User interfaces for editing media

Abstract

The present disclosure generally relates to editing media items.

Description

USER INTERFACES FOR EDITING MEDIACROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

[0001] This application claims priority to U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 18 / 898,008, entitled “USER INTERFACES FOR EDITING MEDIA,” filed September 26, 2024, U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 18 / 896,874, entitled “USER INTERFACES FOR EDITING MEDIA,” filed September 25, 2024, U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 18 / 896,872, entitled “USER INTERFACES FOR EDITING MEDIA,” filed September 25, 2024, U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 63 / 692,153, entitled “USER INTERFACES FOR EDITING MEDIA,” filed September 8, 2024, U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No.63 / 657,810, entitled “USER INTERFACES FOR EDITING MEDIA,” filed June 8, 2024, U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 63 / 645,834, entitled “USER INTERFACES FOR EDITING MEDIA,” filed May 10, 2024, and U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 63 / 631,392, entitled “USER INTERFACES FOR EDITING MEDIA,” filed April 8, 2024. The entire contents of each of these applications are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.FIELD

[0002] The present disclosure relates generally to computer user interfaces, and more specifically to techniques for editing media.BACKGROUND

[0003] Computer systems display user interfaces to edit media, such as photos and / or videos.BRIEF SUMMARY

[0004] Some techniques for editing media using electronic devices, however, are generally cumbersome and inefficient. For example, some existing techniques use a complex and time-consuming user interface, which may include multiple key presses or keystrokes. Existing techniques require more time than necessary, wasting user time and device energy. This latter consideration is particularly important in battery-operated devices.

[0005] Accordingly, the present technique provides electronic devices with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for editing media. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace other methods for editing media. Such methods and interfaces reduce the cognitive burden on a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface. Forbattery-operated computing devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges.

[0006] A method is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The method is performed at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices. The method comprises: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein the media editing user interface includes a media editing control user interface object, and wherein: the media editing control user interface object includes a two-dimensional region that is configured to concurrently adjust a current value of a first parameter of a media item and a current value of a second parameter of the media item; the current value of the first parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of a parameter index point relative to a first axis of the two-dimensional region; and the current value of the second parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to a second axis of the two-dimensional region that is perpendicular to the first axis of the two-dimensional region; while displaying the media editing user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the first parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis; and in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the second parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis.

[0007] A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein the media editing user interface includes a media editing control user interface object, and wherein: themedia editing control user interface object includes a two-dimensional region that is configured to concurrently adjust a current value of a first parameter of a media item and a current value of a second parameter of the media item; the current value of the first parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of a parameter index point relative to a first axis of the two-dimensional region; and the current value of the second parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to a second axis of the two- dimensional region that is perpendicular to the first axis of the two-dimensional region; while displaying the media editing user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the first parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis; and in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the second parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis.

[0008] A transitory computer-readable storage medium is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein the media editing user interface includes a media editing control user interface object, and wherein: the media editing control user interface object includes a two-dimensional region that is configured to concurrently adjust a current value of a first parameter of a media item and a current value of a second parameter of the media item; the current value of the first parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of a parameter index point relative to a first axis of the two-dimensional region; and the current value of the second parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to a second axis of the two-dimensional region that isperpendicular to the first axis of the two-dimensional region; while displaying the media editing user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the first parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis; and in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the second parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis.

[0009] A computer system is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer system is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices and comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein the media editing user interface includes a media editing control user interface object, and wherein: the media editing control user interface object includes a two-dimensional region that is configured to concurrently adjust a current value of a first parameter of a media item and a current value of a second parameter of the media item; the current value of the first parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of a parameter index point relative to a first axis of the two-dimensional region; and the current value of the second parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to a second axis of the two- dimensional region that is perpendicular to the first axis of the two-dimensional region; while displaying the media editing user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the first parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change inposition of the parameter index point relative to the first axis; and in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the second parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis.

[0010] A computer system is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer system is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices and comprises: means for displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein the media editing user interface includes a media editing control user interface object, and wherein: the media editing control user interface object includes a two-dimensional region that is configured to concurrently adjust a current value of a first parameter of a media item and a current value of a second parameter of the media item; the current value of the first parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of a parameter index point relative to a first axis of the two-dimensional region; and the current value of the second parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to a second axis of the two- dimensional region that is perpendicular to the first axis of the two-dimensional region; means for, while displaying the media editing user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object; and means for, in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the first parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis; and in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the second parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis.

[0011] A computer program product is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer program product comprises one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programsincluding instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein the media editing user interface includes a media editing control user interface object, and wherein: the media editing control user interface object includes a two-dimensional region that is configured to concurrently adjust a current value of a first parameter of a media item and a current value of a second parameter of the media item; the current value of the first parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of a parameter index point relative to a first axis of the two-dimensional region; and the current value of the second parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to a second axis of the two-dimensional region that is perpendicular to the first axis of the two-dimensional region; while displaying the media editing user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the first parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis; and in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the second parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis.

[0012] A method is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The method is performed at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices. The method comprises: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first media item in a media library at a first position of a media user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to display a next media item in the media library; in response to detecting the request to display the next media item in the media library: ceasing display of the first media item at the first position of the media user interface; and concurrently displaying, via the one or more display generation components: a second media item at the first position of the media user interface, wherein the second media item is a video media item; and one or more playback parameter controls, wherein the one or more playback parameter controls include a first control that controls a first playback parameter that has multiple states; whiledisplaying the second media item at the first position of the media user interface, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs that includes selection of the first control and selection of a respective state associated with the first control; in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs, selecting the respective state associated with the first control; and while the respective state associated with the first control is selected for the first playback parameter, playing the second media item, including: in accordance with a determination that a first state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of a type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the first state of the first playback parameter; and in accordance with a determination that a second state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of the type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the second state of the first playback parameter.

[0013] A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first media item in a media library at a first position of a media user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to display a next media item in the media library; in response to detecting the request to display the next media item in the media library: ceasing display of the first media item at the first position of the media user interface; and concurrently displaying, via the one or more display generation components: a second media item at the first position of the media user interface, wherein the second media item is a video media item; and one or more playback parameter controls, wherein the one or more playback parameter controls include a first control that controls a first playback parameter that has multiple states; while displaying the second media item at the first position of the media user interface, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs that includes selection of the first control and selection of a respective state associated with the first control; in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs, selecting the respective state associated with the first control; and while the respective state associated with the first control is selected for the first playback parameter, playing the second media item, including: in accordance with a determination that a first state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputtingcontent of a type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the first state of the first playback parameter; and in accordance with a determination that a second state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of the type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the second state of the first playback parameter.

[0014] A transitory computer-readable storage medium is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first media item in a media library at a first position of a media user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to display a next media item in the media library; in response to detecting the request to display the next media item in the media library: ceasing display of the first media item at the first position of the media user interface; and concurrently displaying, via the one or more display generation components: a second media item at the first position of the media user interface, wherein the second media item is a video media item; and one or more playback parameter controls, wherein the one or more playback parameter controls include a first control that controls a first playback parameter that has multiple states; while displaying the second media item at the first position of the media user interface, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs that includes selection of the first control and selection of a respective state associated with the first control; in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs, selecting the respective state associated with the first control; and while the respective state associated with the first control is selected for the first playback parameter, playing the second media item, including: in accordance with a determination that a first state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of a type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the first state of the first playback parameter; and in accordance with a determination that a second state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of the type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the second state of the first playback parameter.

[0015] A computer system is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer system is configured to communicate with one or more display generationcomponents and one or more input devices and comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first media item in a media library at a first position of a media user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to display a next media item in the media library; in response to detecting the request to display the next media item in the media library: ceasing display of the first media item at the first position of the media user interface; and concurrently displaying, via the one or more display generation components: a second media item at the first position of the media user interface, wherein the second media item is a video media item; and one or more playback parameter controls, wherein the one or more playback parameter controls include a first control that controls a first playback parameter that has multiple states; while displaying the second media item at the first position of the media user interface, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs that includes selection of the first control and selection of a respective state associated with the first control; in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs, selecting the respective state associated with the first control; and while the respective state associated with the first control is selected for the first playback parameter, playing the second media item, including: in accordance with a determination that a first state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of a type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the first state of the first playback parameter; and in accordance with a determination that a second state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of the type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the second state of the first playback parameter.

[0016] A computer system is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer system is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices and comprises: means for, while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first media item in a media library at a first position of a media user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to display a next media item in the media library; means for, in response to detecting the request to display the next media item in the media library: ceasing display of the first media item at the first position of the media user interface; and concurrently displaying, via the one or more display generation components: a second media item at the first position of the media userinterface, wherein the second media item is a video media item; and one or more playback parameter controls, wherein the one or more playback parameter controls include a first control that controls a first playback parameter that has multiple states; means for, while displaying the second media item at the first position of the media user interface, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs that includes selection of the first control and selection of a respective state associated with the first control; means for, in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs, selecting the respective state associated with the first control; and means for, while the respective state associated with the first control is selected for the first playback parameter, playing the second media item, including: in accordance with a determination that a first state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of a type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the first state of the first playback parameter; and in accordance with a determination that a second state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of the type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the second state of the first playback parameter.

[0017] A computer program product is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer program product comprises one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first media item in a media library at a first position of a media user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to display a next media item in the media library; in response to detecting the request to display the next media item in the media library: ceasing display of the first media item at the first position of the media user interface; and concurrently displaying, via the one or more display generation components: a second media item at the first position of the media user interface, wherein the second media item is a video media item; and one or more playback parameter controls, wherein the one or more playback parameter controls include a first control that controls a first playback parameter that has multiple states; while displaying the second media item at the first position of the media user interface, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs that includes selection of the first control and selection of a respective state associated with the first control; in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs, selecting the respective state associated with the first control; and while the respective state associated with the first control is selected forthe first playback parameter, playing the second media item, including: in accordance with a determination that a first state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of a type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the first state of the first playback parameter; and in accordance with a determination that a second state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of the type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the second state of the first playback parameter.

[0018] In accordance with some embodiments, a method performed at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generations components and one or more input devices is described. The method comprises: subsequent to a first media item having been edited using a set of edits, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to modify a set of one or more media items based on a respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item, wherein: the respective subset of one or more edits includes one or more edits from the set of edits that were made to the first media item; and the set of one or more media items includes a second media item that is different from the first media item; and in response to detecting the request to modify the set of one or more media items based on the respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item: in accordance with a determination that a first subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the first subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the first subset of one or more edits does not include at least one edit included in the set of edits; and in accordance with a determination that a second subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the second subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the second subset of one or more edits is different from the first subset of one or more edits.

[0019] In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generations components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: subsequent to a first media item having been edited using a set of edits, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to modify a set of one or more media items based on a respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item, wherein: the respective subset of oneor more edits includes one or more edits from the set of edits that were made to the first media item; and the set of one or more media items includes a second media item that is different from the first media item; and in response to detecting the request to modify the set of one or more media items based on the respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item: in accordance with a determination that a first subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the first subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the first subset of one or more edits does not include at least one edit included in the set of edits; and in accordance with a determination that a second subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the second subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the second subset of one or more edits is different from the first subset of one or more edits.

[0020] In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generations components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: subsequent to a first media item having been edited using a set of edits, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to modify a set of one or more media items based on a respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item, wherein: the respective subset of one or more edits includes one or more edits from the set of edits that were made to the first media item; and the set of one or more media items includes a second media item that is different from the first media item; and in response to detecting the request to modify the set of one or more media items based on the respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item: in accordance with a determination that a first subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the first subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the first subset of one or more edits does not include at least one edit included in the set of edits; and in accordance with a determination that a second subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the second subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the second subset of one or more edits is different from the first subset of one or more edits.

[0021] In accordance with some embodiments, a computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generations components and one or more input devices is described. The computer system comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: subsequent to a first media item having been edited using a set of edits, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to modify a set of one or more media items based on a respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item, wherein: the respective subset of one or more edits includes one or more edits from the set of edits that were made to the first media item; and the set of one or more media items includes a second media item that is different from the first media item; and in response to detecting the request to modify the set of one or more media items based on the respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item: in accordance with a determination that a first subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the first subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the first subset of one or more edits does not include at least one edit included in the set of edits; and in accordance with a determination that a second subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the second subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the second subset of one or more edits is different from the first subset of one or more edits.

[0022] In accordance with some embodiments, a computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generations components and one or more input devices is described. The computer system comprises: means for, subsequent to a first media item having been edited using a set of edits, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to modify a set of one or more media items based on a respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item, wherein: the respective subset of one or more edits includes one or more edits from the set of edits that were made to the first media item; and the set of one or more media items includes a second media item that is different from the first media item; and means for, in response to detecting the request to modify the set of one or more media items based on the respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item: in accordance with a determination that a first subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the first subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the first subset ofone or more edits does not include at least one edit included in the set of edits; and in accordance with a determination that a second subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the second subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the second subset of one or more edits is different from the first subset of one or more edits.

[0023] In accordance with some embodiments, a computer program product is described. The computer program product comprises one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generations components and one or more input devices. The one or more programs include instructions for: subsequent to a first media item having been edited using a set of edits, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to modify a set of one or more media items based on a respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item, wherein: the respective subset of one or more edits includes one or more edits from the set of edits that were made to the first media item; and the set of one or more media items includes a second media item that is different from the first media item; and in response to detecting the request to modify the set of one or more media items based on the respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item: in accordance with a determination that a first subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the first subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the first subset of one or more edits does not include at least one edit included in the set of edits; and in accordance with a determination that a second subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the second subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the second subset of one or more edits is different from the first subset of one or more edits.

[0024] In accordance with some embodiments, a method performed at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices is described. The method comprises: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media item including a foreground element and a first background element, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to a request to modify the media item, including: detecting at least a portion of the input is directed to a location of the foreground element and a location of the first background element; and in response to detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify themedia item: in accordance with a determination that an initial location of the input is directed to the location of the first background element, modifying the media item, that is displayed via the one or more display generation components, by modifying at least a portion of the first background element without modifying the foreground element to which the input was directed.

[0025] In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media item including a foreground element and a first background element, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to a request to modify the media item, including: detecting at least a portion of the input is directed to a location of the foreground element and a location of the first background element; and in response to detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item: in accordance with a determination that an initial location of the input is directed to the location of the first background element, modifying the media item, that is displayed via the one or more display generation components, by modifying at least a portion of the first background element without modifying the foreground element to which the input was directed.

[0026] In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media item including a foreground element and a first background element, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to a request to modify the media item, including: detecting at least a portion of the input is directed to a location of the foreground element and a location of the first background element; and in response to detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item: in accordance with a determination that an initial location of the input is directed to the location of the first background element, modifying the media item, that is displayed via the one or more display generation components, by modifying at least a portionof the first background element without modifying the foreground element to which the input was directed.

[0027] In accordance with some embodiments, a computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices is described. The computer system comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media item including a foreground element and a first background element, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to a request to modify the media item, including: detecting at least a portion of the input is directed to a location of the foreground element and a location of the first background element; and in response to detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item: in accordance with a determination that an initial location of the input is directed to the location of the first background element, modifying the media item, that is displayed via the one or more display generation components, by modifying at least a portion of the first background element without modifying the foreground element to which the input was directed.

[0028] In accordance with some embodiments, a computer system that is configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices is described. The computer system comprises: means for, while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media item including a foreground element and a first background element, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to a request to modify the media item, including: detecting at least a portion of the input is directed to a location of the foreground element and a location of the first background element; and means for, in response to detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item: in accordance with a determination that an initial location of the input is directed to the location of the first background element, modifying the media item, that is displayed via the one or more display generation components, by modifying at least a portion of the first background element without modifying the foreground element to which the input was directed.

[0029] In accordance with some embodiments, a computer program product is described. The computer program product comprises one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices. The one or more programsinclude instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media item including a foreground element and a first background element, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to a request to modify the media item, including: detecting at least a portion of the input is directed to a location of the foreground element and a location of the first background element; and in response to detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item: in accordance with a determination that an initial location of the input is directed to the location of the first background element, modifying the media item, that is displayed via the one or more display generation components, by modifying at least a portion of the first background element without modifying the foreground element to which the input was directed.

[0030] A method is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The method is performed at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices. The method comprises: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a representation of a video media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs corresponding to a request to edit the video media item; and in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the request to edit the video media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes: in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is below a threshold playback speed, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface, wherein the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects enable one or more slow motion playback parameters of the video media item to be adjusted; and in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is not below the threshold playback speed, forgoing display of the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface.

[0031] A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a representation of a video media item,detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs corresponding to a request to edit the video media item; and in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the request to edit the video media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes: in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is below a threshold playback speed, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface, wherein the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects enable one or more slow motion playback parameters of the video media item to be adjusted; and in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is not below the threshold playback speed, forgoing display of the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface.

[0032] A transitory computer-readable storage medium is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a representation of a video media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs corresponding to a request to edit the video media item; and in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the request to edit the video media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes: in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is below a threshold playback speed, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface, wherein the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects enable one or more slow motion playback parameters of the video media item to be adjusted; and in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is not below the threshold playback speed, forgoing display of the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface.

[0033] A computer system is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer system is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices and comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a representation of a video media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs corresponding to a request to edit the video media item; and in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the request to edit the video media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes: in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is below a threshold playback speed, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface, wherein the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects enable one or more slow motion playback parameters of the video media item to be adjusted; and in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is not below the threshold playback speed, forgoing display of the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface.

[0034] A computer system is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer system is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices and comprises: means for, while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a representation of a video media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs corresponding to a request to edit the video media item; and means for, in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the request to edit the video media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes: in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is below a threshold playback speed, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface, wherein the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects enable one or more slow motion playback parameters of the video media item to be adjusted; and in accordance with adetermination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is not below the threshold playback speed, forgoing display of the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface.

[0035] A computer program product is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer program product comprises one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a representation of a video media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs corresponding to a request to edit the video media item; and in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the request to edit the video media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes: in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is below a threshold playback speed, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface, wherein the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects enable one or more slow motion playback parameters of the video media item to be adjusted; and in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is not below the threshold playback speed, forgoing display of the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface.

[0036] A method is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The method is performed at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices. The method comprises: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface of a media item that includes audio, wherein the media editing user interface includes an audio control user interface object, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs directed to the audio control user interface object; and in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust a current value of a first audio mix effect to a first value of a plurality of values for the first audio mix effect, adjusting a magnitude of the first audio mixeffect to the first value for the first audio mix effect; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust the current value of the first audio mix effect to a second value of the plurality of values for the first audio mix effect that is different from the first value of the plurality of values, adjusting the magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the second value that is different from the first value for the first audio mix effect.

[0037] A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface of a media item that includes audio, wherein the media editing user interface includes an audio control user interface object, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs directed to the audio control user interface object; and in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust a current value of a first audio mix effect to a first value of a plurality of values for the first audio mix effect, adjusting a magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the first value for the first audio mix effect; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust the current value of the first audio mix effect to a second value of the plurality of values for the first audio mix effect that is different from the first value of the plurality of values, adjusting the magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the second value that is different from the first value for the first audio mix effect.

[0038] A transitory computer-readable storage medium is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface of a media item that includes audio, wherein the media editing user interface includes an audio control user interface object, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs directed tothe audio control user interface object; and in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust a current value of a first audio mix effect to a first value of a plurality of values for the first audio mix effect, adjusting a magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the first value for the first audio mix effect; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust the current value of the first audio mix effect to a second value of the plurality of values for the first audio mix effect that is different from the first value of the plurality of values, adjusting the magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the second value that is different from the first value for the first audio mix effect.

[0039] A computer system is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer system is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices and comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface of a media item that includes audio, wherein the media editing user interface includes an audio control user interface object, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs directed to the audio control user interface object; and in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust a current value of a first audio mix effect to a first value of a plurality of values for the first audio mix effect, adjusting a magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the first value for the first audio mix effect; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust the current value of the first audio mix effect to a second value of the plurality of values for the first audio mix effect that is different from the first value of the plurality of values, adjusting the magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the second value that is different from the first value for the first audio mix effect.

[0040] A computer system is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer system is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices and comprises: means for, while displaying, viathe one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface of a media item that includes audio, wherein the media editing user interface includes an audio control user interface object, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs directed to the audio control user interface object; and means for, in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust a current value of a first audio mix effect to a first value of a plurality of values for the first audio mix effect, adjusting a magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the first value for the first audio mix effect; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust the current value of the first audio mix effect to a second value of the plurality of values for the first audio mix effect that is different from the first value of the plurality of values, adjusting the magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the second value that is different from the first value for the first audio mix effect.

[0041] A computer program product is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer program product comprises one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface of a media item that includes audio, wherein the media editing user interface includes an audio control user interface object, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs directed to the audio control user interface object; and in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust a current value of a first audio mix effect to a first value of a plurality of values for the first audio mix effect, adjusting a magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the first value for the first audio mix effect; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust the current value of the first audio mix effect to a second value of the plurality of values for the first audio mix effect that is different from the first value of the plurality of values, adjusting the magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the second value that is different from the first value for the first audio mix effect.

[0042] A method is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The method is performed at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices. The method comprises: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to apply a respective media style to the media item; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to apply the respective media style to the media item: in accordance with a determination that the one or more user inputs include a first input in a first direction, applying a first media style to the media item, wherein the first media style corresponds to a first category of media styles; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs include a second input in a second direction that is different from the first direction, applying a second media style to the media item, wherein the second media style is different from the first media style, and wherein the second media style corresponds to a second category of media styles that is different from the first category of media styles.

[0043] A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to apply a respective media style to the media item; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to apply the respective media style to the media item: in accordance with a determination that the one or more user inputs include a first input in a first direction, applying a first media style to the media item, wherein the first media style corresponds to a first category of media styles; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs include a second input in a second direction that is different from the first direction, applying a second media style to the media item, wherein the second media style is different from the first media style, and wherein the second media style corresponds to a second category of media styles that is different from the first category of media styles.

[0044] A transitory computer-readable storage medium is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to apply a respective media style to the media item; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to apply the respective media style to the media item: in accordance with a determination that the one or more user inputs include a first input in a first direction, applying a first media style to the media item, wherein the first media style corresponds to a first category of media styles; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs include a second input in a second direction that is different from the first direction, applying a second media style to the media item, wherein the second media style is different from the first media style, and wherein the second media style corresponds to a second category of media styles that is different from the first category of media styles.

[0045] A computer system is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer system is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices and comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to apply a respective media style to the media item; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to apply the respective media style to the media item: in accordance with a determination that the one or more user inputs include a first input in a first direction, applying a first media style to the media item, wherein the first media style corresponds to a first category of media styles; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs include a second input in a second direction that is different from the first direction, applying a second media style to the media item, wherein the second media style is different from the first media style, and wherein the second mediastyle corresponds to a second category of media styles that is different from the first category of media styles.

[0046] A computer system is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer system is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices and comprises: means for, while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to apply a respective media style to the media item; and means for, in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to apply the respective media style to the media item: in accordance with a determination that the one or more user inputs include a first input in a first direction, applying a first media style to the media item, wherein the first media style corresponds to a first category of media styles; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs include a second input in a second direction that is different from the first direction, applying a second media style to the media item, wherein the second media style is different from the first media style, and wherein the second media style corresponds to a second category of media styles that is different from the first category of media styles.

[0047] A computer program product is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer program product comprises one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to apply a respective media style to the media item; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to apply the respective media style to the media item: in accordance with a determination that the one or more user inputs include a first input in a first direction, applying a first media style to the media item, wherein the first media style corresponds to a first category of media styles; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs include a second input in a second direction that is different from the first direction, applying a second media style to the media item, wherein the second media style is different from the first media style, and wherein the second media style corresponds to a second category of media styles that is different from the first category of media styles.

[0048] A method is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The method is performed at a computer system that is in communication with one or more input devices. The method comprises: detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to configure a media style for a camera that is in communication with the computer system; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to configure the media style for the camera that is in communication with the computer system, prompting a user to select one or more media items to preview the media style, wherein the one or more media items correspond to an account of the user.

[0049] A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to configure a media style for a camera that is in communication with the computer system; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to configure the media style for the camera that is in communication with the computer system, prompting a user to select one or more media items to preview the media style, wherein the one or more media items correspond to an account of the user.

[0050] A transitory computer-readable storage medium is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to configure a media style for a camera that is in communication with the computer system; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to configure the media style for the camera that is in communication with the computer system, prompting a user to select one or more media items to preview the media style, wherein the one or more media items correspond to an account of the user.

[0051] A computer system is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer system is configured to communicate with one or more input devices andcomprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to configure a media style for a camera that is in communication with the computer system; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to configure the media style for the camera that is in communication with the computer system, prompting a user to select one or more media items to preview the media style, wherein the one or more media items correspond to an account of the user.

[0052] A computer system is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer system is configured to communicate with one or more input devices and comprises: means for detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to configure a media style for a camera that is in communication with the computer system; and means for, in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to configure the media style for the camera that is in communication with the computer system, prompting a user to select one or more media items to preview the media style, wherein the one or more media items correspond to an account of the user.

[0053] A computer program product is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer program product comprises one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to configure a media style for a camera that is in communication with the computer system; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to configure the media style for the camera that is in communication with the computer system, prompting a user to select one or more media items to preview the media style, wherein the one or more media items correspond to an account of the user.

[0054] A method is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The method is performed at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices. The method comprises: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to edit content of the media item; and in response to detecting theone or more user inputs corresponding to the request to edit the content of the media item: in accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item satisfies a first set of content-based criteria, wherein the first set of content-based criteria is based on an evaluation of content of the media item, replacing a respective portion of the content of the media item with content of a first type; and in accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item does not satisfy the first set of content-based criteria, replacing the respective portion of the content of the media item with content of a second type that is different from the content of the first type.

[0055] A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to edit content of the media item; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to edit the content of the media item: in accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item satisfies a first set of content-based criteria, wherein the first set of content-based criteria is based on an evaluation of content of the media item, replacing a respective portion of the content of the media item with content of a first type; and in accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item does not satisfy the first set of content-based criteria, replacing the respective portion of the content of the media item with content of a second type that is different from the content of the first type.

[0056] A transitory computer-readable storage medium is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to edit content of the media item; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to edit the content of the media item: in accordance with adetermination that the request to edit the content of the media item satisfies a first set of content-based criteria, wherein the first set of content-based criteria is based on an evaluation of content of the media item, replacing a respective portion of the content of the media item with content of a first type; and in accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item does not satisfy the first set of content-based criteria, replacing the respective portion of the content of the media item with content of a second type that is different from the content of the first type.

[0057] A computer system is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer system is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices and comprises: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to edit content of the media item; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to edit the content of the media item: in accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item satisfies a first set of content-based criteria, wherein the first set of content-based criteria is based on an evaluation of content of the media item, replacing a respective portion of the content of the media item with content of a first type; and in accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item does not satisfy the first set of content-based criteria, replacing the respective portion of the content of the media item with content of a second type that is different from the content of the first type.

[0058] A computer system is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer system is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices and comprises: means for, while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to edit content of the media item; and means for, in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to edit the content of the media item: in accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item satisfies a first set of content-based criteria, wherein the first set of content-based criteria is based on an evaluation of content of the media item, replacing a respective portion of the content of themedia item with content of a first type; and in accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item does not satisfy the first set of content-based criteria, replacing the respective portion of the content of the media item with content of a second type that is different from the content of the first type.

[0059] A computer program product is described, in accordance with some embodiments. The computer program product comprises one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to edit content of the media item; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to edit the content of the media item: in accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item satisfies a first set of content-based criteria, wherein the first set of content-based criteria is based on an evaluation of content of the media item, replacing a respective portion of the content of the media item with content of a first type; and in accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item does not satisfy the first set of content-based criteria, replacing the respective portion of the content of the media item with content of a second type that is different from the content of the first type.

[0060] Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors. Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors.

[0061] Thus, devices are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for editing media, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace other methods for editing media.DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

[0062] For a better understanding of the various described embodiments, reference should be made to the Description of Embodiments below, in conjunction with the followingdrawings in which like reference numerals refer to corresponding parts throughout the figures.

[0063] FIG. 1 A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments.

[0064] FIG. IB is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments.

[0065] FIG. 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device having a touch screen in accordance with some embodiments.

[0066] FIG. 3 A is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments.

[0067] FIGS. 3B-3G illustrate the use of Application Programming Interfaces (APIs) to perform operations.

[0068] FIG. 4A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device in accordance with some embodiments.

[0069] FIG. 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display in accordance with some embodiments.

[0070] FIG. 5 A illustrates a personal electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

[0071] FIG. 5B is a block diagram illustrating a personal electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

[0072] FIGS. 6A-6AG illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing photographic styles, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0073] FIGS. 7 A and 7B are flow diagrams illustrating a method for managing photographic styles, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0074] FIGS. 8A-8Z illustrate exemplary user interfaces for editing video media items, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0075] FIGS. 9 A and 9B are flow diagrams illustrating a method for editing video media items, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0076] FIGS. 10A-10R illustrate exemplary user interfaces for selectively applying edits from one image to another image, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0077] FIG. 11 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for selectively applying edits from one image to another image, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0078] FIGS. 12A-12AK illustrate exemplary user interfaces for editing media based on a location of an input, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0079] FIG. 13 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for editing media based on a location of an input, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0080] FIGS. 14A-14L illustrate exemplary user interfaces for editing audio of a media item, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0081] FIG. 15 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for managing slow motion controls, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0082] FIG. 16 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for editing audio of a media item, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0083] FIGS. 17A-17AP illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing media styles, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0084] FIG. 18 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for selecting media styles, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0085] FIG. 19 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for previewing a media style, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0086] FIGS. 20A-20W illustrate exemplary user interfaces for editing a media item, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0087] FIG. 21 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for editing a media item, in accordance with some embodiments.DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS

[0088] The following description sets forth exemplary methods, parameters, and the like. It should be recognized, however, that such description is not intended as a limitation on the scope of the present disclosure but is instead provided as a description of exemplary embodiments.

[0089] There is a need for electronic devices that provide efficient methods and interfaces for editing media. Electronic devices optionally edit media by modifying objects of the media. There is a need for electronic devices to edit media based on a location of where an input begins (e.g., whether the input begins in the foreground and / or background of the media). Such techniques can reduce the cognitive burden on a user who edits media, thereby enhancing productivity. Further, such techniques can reduce processor and battery power otherwise wasted on redundant user inputs.

[0090] Below, FIGS. 1A-1B, 2, 3 A, 4A-4B, and 5A-5B provide a description of exemplary devices for performing the techniques for editing media. FIGS. 6A-6AG illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing photographic styles in accordance with some embodiments. FIGS. 7A-7B are flow diagrams illustrating methods for managing photographic styles in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in FIGS. 6A- 6AG are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIGS. 7A-7B. FIGS. 8A-8Z illustrate exemplary user interfaces for editing video media items in accordance with some embodiments. FIGS. 9A-9B are flow diagrams illustrating methods for editing video media items in accordance with some embodiments. FIG. 15 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for managing slow motion controls in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in FIGS. 8A-8Z are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in FIGS. 9A-9B and 15. FIGS. 10A-10R illustrate exemplary user interfaces for selectively applying edits from one image to another image, in accordance with some embodiments. FIG. 11 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for selectively applying edits from one image to another image, in accordance with some embodiments. FIGS. 12A-12AK illustrate exemplary user interfaces for editing media based on a location of an input in accordance with some embodiments. FIG. 13 is a flow diagram illustrating methods of editing media based on a location of an input in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in FIGS. 12A-12AK are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIG. 13. FIGS. 14A-14L illustrate exemplary user interfaces for editing audio of a media item, in accordance with some embodiments. FIG. 16 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for editing audio of a media item in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in FIGS. 14A-14L are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIG. 16. FIGS. 17A- 17AP illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing media styles, in accordance with some embodiments. FIG. 18 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for selecting mediastyles in accordance with some embodiments. FIG. 19 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for previewing a media style in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in FIGS. 17A-17AP are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIGS. 18 and 19. FIGS. 20A-20W illustrate exemplary user interfaces for editing a media item, in accordance with some embodiments. FIG. 21 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for editing a media item in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in FIGS. 20A-20W are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIG. 21.

[0091] The processes described below enhance the operability of the devices and make the user-device interfaces more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating / interacting with the device) through various techniques, including by providing improved visual feedback to the user, reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation, providing additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls, performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input, and / or additional techniques. These techniques also reduce power usage and improve battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

[0092] In addition, in methods described herein where one or more steps are contingent upon one or more conditions having been met, it should be understood that the described method can be repeated in multiple repetitions so that over the course of the repetitions all of the conditions upon which steps in the method are contingent have been met in different repetitions of the method. For example, if a method requires performing a first step if a condition is satisfied, and a second step if the condition is not satisfied, then a person of ordinary skill would appreciate that the claimed steps are repeated until the condition has been both satisfied and not satisfied, in no particular order. Thus, a method described with one or more steps that are contingent upon one or more conditions having been met could be rewritten as a method that is repeated until each of the conditions described in the method has been met. This, however, is not required of system or computer readable medium claims where the system or computer readable medium contains instructions for performing the contingent operations based on the satisfaction of the corresponding one or more conditions and thus is capable of determining whether the contingency has or has not been satisfied without explicitly repeating steps of a method until all of the conditions upon which steps in the method are contingent have been met. A person having ordinary skill in the art wouldalso understand that, similar to a method with contingent steps, a system or computer readable storage medium can repeat the steps of a method as many times as are needed to ensure that all of the contingent steps have been performed.

[0093] Although the following description uses terms “first,” “second,” etc. to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by the terms. In some embodiments, these terms are used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first touch could be termed a second touch, and, similarly, a second touch could be termed a first touch, without departing from the scope of the various described embodiments. In some embodiments, the first touch and the second touch are two separate references to the same touch. In some embodiments, the first touch and the second touch are both touches, but they are not the same touch.

[0094] The terminology used in the description of the various described embodiments herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting. As used in the description of the various described embodiments and the appended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will also be understood that the term “and / or” as used herein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. It will be further understood that the terms “includes,” “including,” “comprises,” and / or “comprising,” when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and / or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and / or groups thereof.

[0095] The term “if’ is, optionally, construed to mean “when” or “upon” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting,” depending on the context. Similarly, the phrase “if it is determined” or “if [a stated condition or event] is detected” is, optionally, construed to mean “upon determining” or “in response to determining” or “upon detecting [the stated condition or event]” or “in response to detecting [the stated condition or event],” depending on the context.

[0096] Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, and associated processes for using such devices are described. In some embodiments, the device is a portable communications device, such as a mobile telephone, that also contains other functions, such as PDA and / or music player functions. Exemplary embodiments of portablemultifunction devices include, without limitation, the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. Other portable electronic devices, such as laptops or tablet computers with touch-sensitive surfaces (e.g., touch screen displays and / or touchpads), are, optionally, used. It should also be understood that, in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communications device, but is a desktop computer with a touch- sensitive surface (e.g., a touch screen display and / or a touchpad). In some embodiments, the electronic device is a computer system that is in communication (e.g., via wireless communication, via wired communication) with a display generation component (e.g., a display device such as a head-mounted display (HMD), a display, a projector, a touch- sensitive display, or other device or component that presents visual content to a user, for example on or in the display generation component itself or produced from the display generation component and visible elsewhere). The display generation component is configured to provide visual output, such as display via a CRT display, display via an LED display, or display via image projection. In some embodiments, the display generation component is integrated with the computer system. In some embodiments, the display generation component is separate from the computer system. As used herein, “displaying” content includes causing to display the content (e.g., video data rendered or decoded by display controller 156) by transmitting, via a wired or wireless connection, data (e.g., image data or video data) to an integrated or external display generation component to visually produce the content.

[0097] In the discussion that follows, an electronic device that includes a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. It should be understood, however, that the electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse, and / or a joystick.

[0098] The device typically supports a variety of applications, such as one or more of the following: a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a website creation application, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephone application, a video conferencing application, an e-mail application, an instant messaging application, a workout support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video camera application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application, and / or a digital video player application.

[0099] The various applications that are executed on the device optionally use at least one common physical user-interface device, such as the touch-sensitive surface. One or morefunctions of the touch-sensitive surface as well as corresponding information displayed on the device are, optionally, adjusted and / or varied from one application to the next and / or within a respective application. In this way, a common physical architecture (such as the touch- sensitive surface) of the device optionally supports the variety of applications with user interfaces that are intuitive and transparent to the user.

[0100] Attention is now directed toward embodiments of portable devices with touch- sensitive displays. FIG. 1 A is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device 100 with touch-sensitive display system 112 in accordance with some embodiments. Touch- sensitive display 112 is sometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience and is sometimes known as or called a “touch-sensitive display system.” Device 100 includes memory 102 (which optionally includes one or more computer-readable storage mediums), memory controller 122, one or more processing units (CPUs) 120, peripherals interface 118, RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, input / output (I / O) subsystem 106, other input control devices 116, and external port 124. Device 100 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 164. Device 100 optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensity of contacts on device 100 (e.g., a touch- sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100). Device 100 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs on device 100 (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch- sensitive display system 112 of device 100 or touchpad 355 of device 300). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines 103.

[0101] As used in the specification and claims, the term “intensity” of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average) to determine an estimated force of a contact. Similarly, a pressure-sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch- sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and / or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and / or changes thereto, and / or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and / or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements). In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure, and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure). Using the intensity of a contact as an attribute of a user input allows for user access to additional device functionality that may otherwise not be accessible by the user on a reduced-size device with limited real estate for displaying affordances (e.g., on a touch- sensitive display) and / or receiving user input (e.g., via a touch-sensitive display, a touch- sensitive surface, or a physical / mechanical control such as a knob or a button).

[0102] As used in the specification and claims, the term “tactile output” refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user’s sense of touch. For example, in situations where the device or the component of the device is in contact with a surface of a user that is sensitive to touch (e.g., a finger, palm, or other part of a user’s hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or the component of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch- sensitive display or trackpad) is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a “down click” or “up click” of a physical actuator button. In some cases, a user will feel a tactile sensation such as an “down click” or “up click” even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user’s movements. As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as “roughness” of the touch-sensitive surface,even when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users. Thus, when a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an “up click,” a “down click,” “roughness”), unless otherwise stated, the generated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that will generate the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user.

[0103] It should be appreciated that device 100 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device 100 optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in FIG. 1 A are implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of both hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and / or application-specific integrated circuits.

[0104] Memory 102 optionally includes high-speed random access memory and optionally also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Memory controller 122 optionally controls access to memory 102 by other components of device 100.

[0105] Peripherals interface 118 can be used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU 120 and memory 102. The one or more processors 120 run or execute various software programs (such as computer programs (e.g., including instructions)) and / or sets of instructions stored in memory 102 to perform various functions for device 100 and to process data. In some embodiments, peripherals interface 118, CPU 120, and memory controller 122 are, optionally, implemented on a single chip, such as chip 104. In some other embodiments, they are, optionally, implemented on separate chips.

[0106] RF (radio frequency) circuitry 108 receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 converts electrical signals to / from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth.RF circuitry 108 optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and / or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and / or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication. The RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for detecting near field communication (NFC) fields, such as by a short-range communication radio. The wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), long term evolution (LTE), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy (BTLE), Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802. I la, IEEE 802.1 lb, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.1 In, and / or IEEE 802.1 lac), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, a protocol for e-mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and / or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS)), and / or Short Message Service (SMS), or any other suitable communication protocol, including communication protocols not yet developed as of the filing date of this document.

[0107] Audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, and microphone 113 provide an audio interface between a user and device 100. Audio circuitry 110 receives audio data from peripherals interface 118, converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker 111. Speaker 111 converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves. Audio circuitry 110 also receives electrical signals converted by microphone 113 from sound waves. Audio circuitry 110 converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface 118 for processing. Audio data is, optionally, retrieved from and / or transmitted to memory 102 and / or RF circuitry 108 by peripherals interface 118. In some embodiments, audio circuitry 110 also includes a headset jack (e.g., 212, FIG. 2). The headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry 110 and removable audio input / output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone).

[0108] I / O subsystem 106 couples input / output peripherals on device 100, such as touch- sensitive displayl 12 and other input control devices 116, to peripherals interface 118. I / O subsystem 106 optionally includes display controller 156, optical sensor controller 158, depth camera controller 169, intensity sensor controller 159, haptic feedback controller 161, and one or more input controllers 160 for other input or control devices. The one or more input controllers 160 receive / send electrical signals from / to other input control devices 116. The other input control devices 116 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth. In some embodiments, input controller(s) 160 are, optionally, coupled to any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, an infrared port, a USB port, and a pointer device such as a mouse. The one or more buttons (e.g., 208, FIG. 2) optionally include an up / down button for volume control of speaker 111 and / or microphone 113. The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g., 206, FIG. 2). In some embodiments, the electronic device is a computer system that is in communication (e.g., via wireless communication, via wired communication) with one or more input devices. In some embodiments, the one or more input devices include a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a trackpad, as part of a touch-sensitive display). In some embodiments, the one or more input devices include one or more camera sensors (e.g., one or more optical sensors 164 and / or one or more depth camera sensors 175), such as for tracking a user’s gestures (e.g., hand gestures and / or air gestures) as input. In some embodiments, the one or more input devices are integrated with the computer system. In some embodiments, the one or more input devices are separate from the computer system. In some embodiments, an air gesture is a gesture that is detected without the user touching an input element that is part of the device (or independently of an input element that is a part of the device) and is based on detected motion of a portion of the user’s body through the air including motion of the user’s body relative to an absolute reference (e.g., an angle of the user’s arm relative to the ground or a distance of the user’s hand relative to the ground), relative to another portion of the user’s body (e.g., movement of a hand of the user relative to a shoulder of the user, movement of one hand of the user relative to another hand of the user, and / or movement of a finger of the user relative to another finger or portion of a hand of the user), and / or absolute motion of a portion of the user’s body (e.g., a tap gesture that includes movement of a hand in a predetermined pose by a predetermined amount and / or speed, or a shake gesture that includes a predetermined speed or amount of rotation of a portion of the user’s body).

[0109] A quick press of the push button optionally disengages a lock of touch screen 112 or optionally begins a process that uses gestures on the touch screen to unlock the device, as described in U.S. Patent Application 11 / 322,549, “Unlocking a Device by Performing Gestures on an Unlock Image,” filed December 23, 2005, U.S. Pat. No. 7,657,849, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. A longer press of the push button (e.g., 206) optionally turns power to device 100 on or off. The functionality of one or more of the buttons are, optionally, user-customizable. Touch screen 112 is used to implement virtual or soft buttons and one or more soft keyboards.

[0110] Touch screenl 12 provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and a user. Display controller 156 receives and / or sends electrical signals from / to touch screen 112. Touch screen 112 displays visual output to the user. The visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed “graphics”). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output optionally corresponds to user-interface objects.[OHl] Touch screen 112 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor, or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and / or tactile contact. Touch screen 112 and display controller 156 (along with any associated modules and / or sets of instructions in memory 102) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch screen 112 and convert the detected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images) that are displayed on touch screen 112. In an exemplary embodiment, a point of contact between touch screen 112 and the user corresponds to a finger of the user.

[0112] Touch screen 112 optionally uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies are used in other embodiments. Touch screen 112 and display controller 156 optionally detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch screen 112. In an exemplary embodiment, projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone® and iPod Touch® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.

[0113] A touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 112 is, optionally, analogous to the multi-touch sensitive touchpads described in the following U.S. Patents: 6,323,846 (Westerman et al.), 6,570,557 (Westerman et al.), and / or 6,677,932 (Westerman), and / or U.S. Patent Publication 2002 / 0015024A1, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. However, touch screen 112 displays visual output from device 100, whereas touch-sensitive touchpads do not provide visual output.

[0114] A touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 112 is described in the following applications: (1) U.S. Patent Application No. 11 / 381,313, “Multipoint Touch Surface Controller,” filed May 2, 2006; (2) U.S. Patent Application No. 10 / 840,862, “Multipoint Touchscreen,” filed May 6, 2004; (3) U.S. Patent Application No. 10 / 903,964, “Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed July 30, 2004; (4) U.S. Patent Application No. 11 / 048,264, “Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed January 31, 2005; (5) U.S. Patent Application No. 11 / 038,590, “Mode-Based Graphical User Interfaces For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed January 18, 2005; (6) U.S. Patent Application No. 11 / 228,758, “Virtual Input Device Placement On A Touch Screen User Interface,” filed September 16, 2005; (7) U.S. Patent Application No. 11 / 228,700, “Operation Of A Computer With A Touch Screen Interface,” filed September 16, 2005; (8) U.S. Patent Application No. 11 / 228,737, “Activating Virtual Keys Of A Touch-Screen Virtual Keyboard,” filed September 16, 2005; and (9) U.S. Patent Application No. 11 / 367,749, “Multi-Functional Hand-Held Device,” filed March 3, 2006. All of these applications are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.

[0115] Touch screen 112 optionally has a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen has a video resolution of approximately 160 dpi. The user optionally makes contact with touch screen 112 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work primarily with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylusbased input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer / cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user.

[0116] In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen, device 100 optionally includes a touchpad for activating or deactivating particular functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is, optionally, a touch-sensitive surfacethat is separate from touch screen 112 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen.

[0117] Device 100 also includes power system 162 for powering the various components. Power system 162 optionally includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices.

[0118] Device 100 optionally also includes secure element 163 for securely storing information. In some embodiments, secure element 163 is a hardware component (e.g., a secure microcontroller chip) configured to securely store data or an algorithm. In some embodiments, secure element 163 provides (e.g., releases) secure information (e.g., payment information (e.g., an account number and / or a transaction-specific dynamic security code), identification information (e.g., credentials of a state-approved digital identification), and / or authentication information (e.g., data generated using a cryptography engine and / or by performing asymmetric cryptography operations)). In some embodiments, secure element 163 provides (or releases) the secure information in response to device 100 receiving authorization, such as a user authentication (e.g., fingerprint authentication; passcode authentication; detecting double-press of a hardware button when device 100 is in an unlocked state, and optionally, while device 100 has been continuously on a user’s wrist since device 100 was unlocked by providing authentication credentials to device 100, where the continuous presence of device 100 on the user’s wrist is determined by periodically checking that the device is in contact with the user’s skin). For example, device 100 detects a fingerprint at a fingerprint sensor (e.g., a fingerprint sensor integrated into a button) of device 100. Device 100 determines whether the detected fingerprint is consistent with an enrolled fingerprint. In accordance with a determination that the fingerprint is consistent with the enrolled fingerprint, secure element 163 provides (e.g., releases) the secure information. In accordance with a determination that the fingerprint is not consistent with the enrolled fingerprint, secure element 163 forgoes providing (e.g., releasing) the secure information.

[0119] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more optical sensors 164. FIG. 1A shows an optical sensor coupled to optical sensor controller 158 in I / O subsystem 106. Optical sensor 164 optionally includes charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors. Optical sensor 164 receives light fromthe environment, projected through one or more lenses, and converts the light to data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module 143 (also called a camera module), optical sensor 164 optionally captures still images or video. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch screen display 112 on the front of the device so that the touch screen display is enabled for use as a viewfinder for still and / or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the front of the device so that the user’s image is, optionally, obtained for video conferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen display. In some embodiments, the position of optical sensor 164 can be changed by the user (e.g., by rotating the lens and the sensor in the device housing) so that a single optical sensor 164 is used along with the touch screen display for both video conferencing and still and / or video image acquisition.

[0120] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more depth camera sensors 175.FIG. 1A shows a depth camera sensor coupled to depth camera controller 169 in I / O subsystem 106. Depth camera sensor 175 receives data from the environment to create a three dimensional model of an object (e.g., a face) within a scene from a viewpoint (e.g., a depth camera sensor). In some embodiments, in conjunction with imaging module 143 (also called a camera module), depth camera sensor 175 is optionally used to determine a depth map of different portions of an image captured by the imaging module 143. In some embodiments, a depth camera sensor is located on the front of device 100 so that the user’s image with depth information is, optionally, obtained for video conferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen display and to capture selfies with depth map data. In some embodiments, the depth camera sensor 175 is located on the back of device, or on the back and the front of the device 100. In some embodiments, the position of depth camera sensor 175 can be changed by the user (e.g., by rotating the lens and the sensor in the device housing) so that a depth camera sensor 175 is used along with the touch screen display for both video conferencing and still and / or video image acquisition.

[0121] In some embodiments, a depth map (e.g., depth map image) contains information (e.g., values) that relates to the distance of objects in a scene from a viewpoint (e.g., a camera, an optical sensor, a depth camera sensor). In one embodiment of a depth map, each depth pixel defines the position in the viewpoint's Z-axis where its corresponding two- dimensional pixel is located. In some embodiments, a depth map is composed of pixels wherein each pixel is defined by a value (e.g., 0 - 255). For example, the "0" value representspixels that are located at the most distant place in a "three dimensional" scene and the "255" value represents pixels that are located closest to a viewpoint (e.g., a camera, an optical sensor, a depth camera sensor) in the "three dimensional" scene. In other embodiments, a depth map represents the distance between an object in a scene and the plane of the viewpoint. In some embodiments, the depth map includes information about the relative depth of various features of an object of interest in view of the depth camera (e.g., the relative depth of eyes, nose, mouth, ears of a user’s face). In some embodiments, the depth map includes information that enables the device to determine contours of the object of interest in a z direction.

[0122] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165. FIG. 1A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled to intensity sensor controller 159 in I / O subsystem 106. Contact intensity sensor 165 optionally includes one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). Contact intensity sensor 165 receives contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch screen display 112, which is located on the front of device 100.

[0123] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more proximity sensors 166. FIG. 1A shows proximity sensor 166 coupled to peripherals interface 118. Alternately, proximity sensor 166 is, optionally, coupled to input controller 160 in I / O subsystem 106. Proximity sensor 166 optionally performs as described in U.S. Patent Application Nos. 11 / 241,839, “Proximity Detector In Handheld Device”; 11 / 240,788, “Proximity Detector In Handheld Device”; 11 / 620,702, “Using Ambient Light Sensor To Augment Proximity Sensor Output”; 11 / 586,862, “Automated Response To And Sensing Of User Activity In Portable Devices”; and 11 / 638,251, “Methods And Systems For Automatic Configuration Of Peripherals,” which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. In some embodiments, the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch screen 112 when the multifunction device is placed near the user’s ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call).

[0124] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators 167. FIG. 1 A shows a tactile output generator coupled to haptic feedback controller 161 in I / O subsystem 106. Tactile output generator 167 optionally includes one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and / or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device). Contact intensity sensor 165 receives tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback module 133 and generates tactile outputs on device 100 that are capable of being sensed by a user of device 100. In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch- sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in / out of a surface of device 100) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device 100). In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch screen display 112, which is located on the front of device 100.

[0125] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more accelerometers 168. FIG. 1 A shows accelerometer 168 coupled to peripherals interface 118. Alternately, accelerometer 168 is, optionally, coupled to an input controller 160 in I / O subsystem 106. Accelerometer 168 optionally performs as described in U.S. Patent Publication No. 20050190059, “Acceleration-based Theft Detection System for Portable Electronic Devices,” and U.S. Patent Publication No. 20060017692, “Methods And Apparatuses For Operating A Portable Device Based On An Accelerometer,” both of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers. Device 100 optionally includes, in addition to accelerometer(s) 168, a magnetometer and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of device 100.

[0126] In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory 102 include operating system 126, biometric module 109, communication module (or set of instructions) 128, contact / motion module (or set of instructions) 130, graphics module (or set of instructions) 132, text input module (or set of instructions) 134, Global Positioning System(GPS) module (or set of instructions) 135, authentication module 105, and applications (or sets of instructions) 136. Furthermore, in some embodiments, memory 102 (FIG. 1A) or 370 (FIG. 3 A) stores device / global internal state 157, as shown in FIGS. 1A and 3 A.Device / global internal state 157 includes one or more of: active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other information occupy various regions of touch screen display 112; sensor state, including information obtained from the device’s various sensors and input control devices 116; and location information concerning the device’s location and / or attitude.

[0127] Operating system 126 (e.g., Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, iOS, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includes various software components and / or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components.

[0128] Communication module 128 facilitates communication with other devices over one or more external ports 124 and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry 108 and / or external port 124. External port 124 (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.) is adapted for coupling directly to other devices or indirectly over a network (e.g., the Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and / or compatible with, the 30-pin connector used on iPod® (trademark of Apple Inc.) devices.

[0129] Biometric module 109 optionally stores information about one or more enrolled biometric features (e.g., fingerprint feature information, facial recognition feature information, eye and / or iris feature information) for use to verify whether received biometric information matches the enrolled biometric features. In some embodiments, the information stored about the one or more enrolled biometric features includes data that enables the comparison between the stored information and received biometric information without including enough information to reproduce the enrolled biometric features. In some embodiments, biometric module 109 stores the information about the enrolled biometric features in association with a user account of device 100. In some embodiments, biometric module 109 compares the received biometric information to an enrolled biometric feature to determine whether the received biometric information matches the enrolled biometric feature.

[0130] Contact / motion module 130 optionally detects contact with touch screen 112 (in conjunction with display controller 156) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel). Contact / motion module 130 includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact, such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact). Contact / motion module 130 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface.Determining movement of the point of contact, which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and / or an acceleration (a change in magnitude and / or direction) of the point of contact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., “multitouch’Vmultiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact / motion module 130 and display controller 156 detect contact on a touchpad.

[0131] In some embodiments, contact / motion module 130 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has “clicked” on an icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device 100). For example, a mouse “click” threshold of a trackpad or touch screen display can be set to any of a large range of predefined threshold values without changing the trackpad or touch screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations, a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and / or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click “intensity” parameter).

[0132] Contact / motion module 130 optionally detects a gesture input by a user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and / or intensities of detected contacts). Thus, a gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a particular contact pattern. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event at the sameposition (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event.

[0133] Graphics module 132 includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch screen 112 or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast, or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed. As used herein, the term “graphics” includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including, without limitation, text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations, and the like.

[0134] In some embodiments, graphics module 132 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module 132 receives, from applications etc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to display controller 156.

[0135] Haptic feedback module 133 includes various software components for generating instructions used by tactile output generator(s) 167 to produce tactile outputs at one or more locations on device 100 in response to user interactions with device 100.

[0136] Text input module 134, which is, optionally, a component of graphics module 132, provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts module 137, e-mail client module 140, IM module 141, browser module 147, and any other application that needs text input).

[0137] GPS module 135 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone module 138 for use in locationbased dialing; to camera module 143 as picture / video metadata; and to applications that provide location-based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map / navigation widgets).

[0138] Authentication module 105 determines whether a requested operation (e.g., requested by an application of applications 136) is authorized to be performed. In some embodiments, authentication module 105 receives for an operation to be perform that optionally requires authentication. Authentication module 105 determines whether theoperation is authorized to be performed, such as based on a series of factors, including the lock status of device 100, the location of device 100, whether a security delay has elapsed, whether received biometric information matches enrolled biometric features, and / or other factors. Once authentication module 105 determines that the operation is authorized to be performed, authentication module 105 triggers performance of the operation.

[0139] Applications 136 optionally include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof:• Contacts module 137 (sometimes called an address book or contact list);• Telephone module 138;• Video conference module 139;• E-mail client module 140;• Instant messaging (IM) module 141;• Workout support module 142;• Camera module 143 for still and / or video images;• Image management module 144;• Video player module;• Music player module;• Browser module 147;• Calendar module 148;• Widget modules 149, which optionally include one or more of: weather widget 149-1, stocks widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, dictionary widget 149-5, and other widgets obtained by the user, as well as user-created widgets 149-6;• Widget creator module 150 for making user-created widgets 149-6;• Search module 151;• Video and music player module 152, which merges video player module and music player module;• Notes module 153;• Map module 154; and / orOnline video module 155.

[0140] Examples of other applications 136 that are, optionally, stored in memory 102 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication.

[0141] In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact / motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, contacts module 137 are, optionally, used to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state 192 of contacts module 137 in memory 102 or memory 370), including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e-mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers or e-mail addresses to initiate and / or facilitate communications by telephone module 138, video conference module 139, e-mail client module 140, or IM module 141; and so forth.

[0142] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact / motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, telephone module 138 are optionally, used to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in contacts module 137, modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation, and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed. As noted above, the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies.

[0143] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, touch screen 112, display controller 156, optical sensor 164, optical sensor controller 158, contact / motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, contacts module 137, and telephone module 138, video conference module 139 includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions.

[0144] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact / motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, e-mail clientmodule 140 includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response to user instructions. In conjunction with image management module 144, e-mail client module 140 makes it very easy to create and send e-mails with still or video images taken with camera module 143.

[0145] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact / motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, the instant messaging module 141 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony -based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS for Internet-based instant messages), to receive instant messages, and to view received instant messages. In some embodiments, transmitted and / or received instant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and / or other attachments as are supported in an MMS and / or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, “instant messaging” refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS).

[0146] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact / motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, GPS module 135, map module 154, and music player module, workout support module 142 includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and / or calorie burning goals); communicate with workout sensors (sports devices); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store, and transmit workout data.

[0147] In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, optical sensor(s) 164, optical sensor controller 158, contact / motion module 130, graphics module 132, and image management module 144, camera module 143 includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory 102, modify characteristics of a still image or video, or delete a still image or video from memory 102.

[0148] In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact / motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and camera module 143, imagemanagement module 144 includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and / or video images.

[0149] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact / motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, browser module 147 includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages.

[0150] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact / motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, e-mail client module 140, and browser module 147, calendar module 148 includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to-do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions.

[0151] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact / motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, widget modules 149 are mini-applications that are, optionally, downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget 149-1, stocks widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, and dictionary widget 149-5) or created by the user (e.g., user- created widget 149-6). In some embodiments, a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets).

[0152] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact / motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, the widget creator module 150 are, optionally, used by a user to create widgets (e.g., turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget).

[0153] In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact / motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, search module 151 includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and / or other files in memory 102 that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions.

[0154] In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact / motion module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, and browser module 147, video and music player module 152 includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present, or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touch screen 112 or on an external, connected display via external port 124). In some embodiments, device 100 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.).

[0155] In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact / motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, notes module 153 includes executable instructions to create and manage notes, to-do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions.

[0156] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact / motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, GPS module 135, and browser module 147, map module 154 are, optionally, used to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions, data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location, and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions.

[0157] In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact / motion module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, text input module 134, e-mail client module 140, and browser module 147, online video module 155 includes instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and / or download), play back (e.g., on the touch screen or on an external, connected display via external port 124), send an e-mail with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264. In some embodiments, instant messaging module 141, rather than e-mail client module 140, is used to send a link to a particular online video. Additional description of the online video application can be found in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60 / 936,562, “Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos,” filed June 20, 2007, and U.S. Patent Application No. 11 / 968,067, “Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos,” filed December 31, 2007, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

[0158] Each of the above-identified modules and applications corresponds to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). These modules (e.g., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs (such as computer programs (e.g., including instructions)), procedures, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. For example, video player module is, optionally, combined with music player module into a single module (e.g., video and music player module 152, FIG. 1A). In some embodiments, memory 102 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 102 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.

[0159] In some embodiments, device 100 is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and / or a touchpad. By using a touch screen and / or a touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device 100, the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) on device 100 is, optionally, reduced.

[0160] The predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and / or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by the user, navigates device 100 to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device 100. In such embodiments, a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad.

[0161] FIG. IB is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 102 (FIG. 1A) or 370 (FIG. 3 A) includes event sorter 170 (e.g., in operating system 126) and a respective application 136-1 (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 137-151, 155, 380-390).

[0162] Event sorter 170 receives event information and determines the application 136-1 and application view 191 of application 136-1 to which to deliver the event information. Event sorter 170 includes event monitor 171 and event dispatcher module 174. In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes application internal state 192, which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display 112 when the application is active or executing. In some embodiments, device / global internal state 157 is used by eventsorter 170 to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state 192 is used by event sorter 170 to determine application views 191 to which to deliver event information.

[0163] In some embodiments, application internal state 192 includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application 136-1 resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application 136-1, a state queue for enabling the user to go back to a prior state or view of application 136-1, and a redo / undo queue of previous actions taken by the user.

[0164] Event monitor 171 receives event information from peripherals interface 118. Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touch- sensitive display 112, as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripherals interface 118 transmits information it receives from I / O subsystem 106 or a sensor, such as proximity sensor 166, accelerometer(s) 168, and / or microphone 113 (through audio circuitry 110). Information that peripherals interface 118 receives from VO subsystem 106 includes information from touch- sensitive display 112 or a touch-sensitive surface.

[0165] In some embodiments, event monitor 171 sends requests to the peripherals interface 118 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and / or for more than a predetermined duration).

[0166] In some embodiments, event sorter 170 also includes a hit view determination module 172 and / or an active event recognizer determination module 173.

[0167] Hit view determination module 172 provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views when touch-sensitive display 112 displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display.

[0168] Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes herein called application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected optionally correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowestlevel view in which a touch is detected is, optionally, called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as proper inputs are, optionally, determined based, at least in part, on the hit view of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture.

[0169] Hit view determination module 172 receives information related to sub-events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 172 identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (e.g., the first sub-event in the sequence of subevents that form an event or potential event). Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determination module 172, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view.

[0170] Active event recognizer determination module 173 determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touch sub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain as actively involved views.

[0171] Event dispatcher module 174 dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer 180). In embodiments including active event recognizer determination module 173, event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 173. In some embodiments, event dispatcher module 174 stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver 182.

[0172] In some embodiments, operating system 126 includes event sorter 170.Alternatively, application 136-1 includes event sorter 170. In yet other embodiments, event sorter 170 is a stand-alone module, or a part of another module stored in memory 102, such as contact / motion module 130.

[0173] In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes a plurality of event handlers190 and one or more application views 191, each of which includes instructions for handlingtouch events that occur within a respective view of the application’s user interface. Each application view 191 of the application 136-1 includes one or more event recognizers 180. Typically, a respective application view 191 includes a plurality of event recognizers 180. In other embodiments, one or more of event recognizers 180 are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit or a higher level object from which application 136-1 inherits methods and other properties. In some embodiments, a respective event handler 190 includes one or more of: data updater 176, object updater 177, GUI updater 178, and / or event data 179 received from event sorter 170. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater176, object updater 177, or GUI updater 178 to update the application internal state 192. Alternatively, one or more of the application views 191 include one or more respective event handlers 190. Also, in some embodiments, one or more of data updater 176, object updater177, and GUI updater 178 are included in a respective application view 191.

[0174] A respective event recognizer 180 receives event information (e.g., event data 179) from event sorter 170 and identifies an event from the event information. Event recognizer 180 includes event receiver 182 and event comparator 184. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 also includes at least a subset of: metadata 183, and event delivery instructions 188 (which optionally include sub-event delivery instructions).

[0175] Event receiver 182 receives event information from event sorter 170. The event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a touch, the event information optionally also includes speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device.

[0176] Event comparator 184 compares the event information to predefined event or subevent definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub-event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 includes event definitions 186. Event definitions 186 contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event 1 (187-1), event 2 (187- 2), and others. In some embodiments, sub-events in an event (e.g., 187-1 and / or 187-2) include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, andmultiple touching. In one example, the definition for event 1 (187-1) is a double tap on a displayed object. The double tap, for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition for event 2 (187-2) is a dragging on a displayed object. The dragging, for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch-sensitive display 112, and liftoff of the touch (touch end). In some embodiments, the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers 190.

[0177] In some embodiments, event definitions 186 include a definition of an event for a respective user-interface object. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view in which three user-interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display 112, when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display 112, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which of the three user-interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler 190, the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler 190 should be activated. For example, event comparator 184 selects an event handler associated with the sub-event and the object triggering the hit test.

[0178] In some embodiments, the definition for a respective event (187) also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer’s event type.

[0179] When a respective event recognizer 180 determines that the series of sub-events do not match any of the events in event definitions 186, the respective event recognizer 180 enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub-events of an ongoing touch-based gesture.

[0180] In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 includes metadata 183 with configurable properties, flags, and / or lists that indicate how the event delivery systemshould perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and / or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and / or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy.

[0181] In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 activates event handler 190 associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized. In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 delivers event information associated with the event to event handler 190. Activating an event handler 190 is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler 190 associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process.

[0182] In some embodiments, event delivery instructions 188 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process.

[0183] In some embodiments, data updater 176 creates and updates data used in application 136-1. For example, data updater 176 updates the telephone number used in contacts module 137, or stores a video file used in video player module. In some embodiments, object updater 177 creates and updates objects used in application 136-1. For example, object updater 177 creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object. GUI updater 178 updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater 178 prepares display information and sends it to graphics module 132 for display on a touch- sensitive display.

[0184] In some embodiments, event handler(s) 190 includes or has access to data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178. In some embodiments, data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178 are included in a single module of a respective application 136-1 or application view 191. In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules.

[0185] It shall be understood that the foregoing discussion regarding event handling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies to other forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices 100 with input devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens. For example, mouse movement and mouse button presses, optionally coordinated with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements such as taps, drags, scrolls, etc. on touchpads; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye movements; biometric inputs; and / or any combination thereof are optionally utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to be recognized.

[0186] FIG. 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device 100 having a touch screen 112 in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI) 200. In this embodiment, as well as others described below, a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers 202 (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses 203 (not drawn to scale in the figure). In some embodiments, selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward and / or downward), and / or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward and / or downward) that has made contact with device 100. In some implementations or circumstances, inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap.

[0187] Device 100 optionally also include one or more physical buttons, such as “home” or menu button 204. As described previously, menu button 204 is, optionally, used to navigate to any application 136 in a set of applications that are, optionally, executed on device 100. Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on touch screen 112.

[0188] In some embodiments, device 100 includes touch screen 112, menu button 204, push button 206 for powering the device on / off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s) 208, subscriber identity module (SIM) card slot 210, headset jack 212, and docking / charging external port 124. Push button 206 is, optionally, used to turn the power on / off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing thebutton before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and / or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process. In an alternative embodiment, device 100 also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone 113. Device 100 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensity of contacts on touch screen 112 and / or one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 100.

[0189] FIG. 3 A is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. Device 300 need not be portable. In some embodiments, device 300 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child’s learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller). Device 300 typically includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 310, one or more network or other communications interfaces 360, memory 370, and one or more communication buses 320 for interconnecting these components. Communication buses 320 optionally include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components. Device 300 includes input / output (I / O) interface 330 comprising display 340, which is typically a touch screen display. I / O interface 330 also optionally includes a keyboard and / or mouse (or other pointing device) 350 and touchpad 355, tactile output generator 357 for generating tactile outputs on device 300 (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s) 167 described above with reference to FIG. 1 A), sensors 359 (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and / or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s) 165 described above with reference to FIG. 1 A). Memory 370 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random access solid state memory devices; and optionally includes nonvolatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory 370 optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from CPU(s) 310. In some embodiments, memory 370 stores programs, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs, modules, and data structures stored in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (FIG. 1 A), or a subset thereof. Furthermore, memory 370 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100. For example, memory 370 of device 300 optionally stores drawing module 380, presentation module 382, word processing module 384, website creation module386, disk authoring module 388, and / or spreadsheet module 390, while memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (FIG. 1 A) optionally does not store these modules.

[0190] Each of the above-identified elements in FIG. 3 A is, optionally, stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices. Each of the above-identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above. The aboveidentified modules or computer programs (e.g., sets of instructions or including instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs (such as computer programs (e.g., including instructions)), procedures, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 370 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 370 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.

[0191] Implementations within the scope of the present disclosure can be partially or entirely realized using a tangible computer-readable storage medium (or multiple tangible computer-readable storage media of one or more types) encoding one or more computer- readable instructions. It should be recognized that computer-readable instructions can be organized in any format, including applications, widgets, processes, software, and / or components.

[0192] Implementations within the scope of the present disclosure include a computer- readable storage medium that encodes instructions organized as an application (e.g., application 3160) that, when executed by one or more processing units, control an electronic device (e.g., device 3150) to perform the method of FIG. 3B, the method of FIG. 3C, and / or one or more other processes and / or methods described herein.

[0193] It should be recognized that application 3160 (shown in FIG. 3D) can be any suitable type of application, including, for example, one or more of: a browser application, an application that functions as an execution environment for plug-ins, widgets or other applications, a fitness application, a health application, a digital payments application, a media application, a social network application, a messaging application, and / or a maps application. In some embodiments, application 3160 is an application that is pre-installed on device 3150 at purchase (e.g., a first-party application). In some embodiments, application 3160 is an application that is provided to device 3150 via an operating system update file (e.g., a first-party application or a second-party application). In some embodiments,application 3160 is an application that is provided via an application store. In some embodiments, the application store can be an application store that is pre-installed on device 3150 at purchase (e.g., a first-party application store). In some embodiments, the application store is a third-party application store (e.g., an application store that is provided by another application store, downloaded via a network, and / or read from a storage device).

[0194] Referring to FIG. 3B and FIG. 3F, application 3160 obtains information (e.g., 3010). In some embodiments, at 3010, information is obtained from at least one hardware component of device 3150. In some embodiments, at 3010, information is obtained from at least one software module of device 3150. In some embodiments, at 3010, information is obtained from at least one hardware component external to device 3150 (e.g., a peripheral device, an accessory device, and / or a server). In some embodiments, the information obtained at 3010 includes positional information, time information, notification information, user information, environment information, electronic device state information, weather information, media information, historical information, event information, hardware information, and / or motion information. In some embodiments, in response to and / or after obtaining the information at 3010, application 3160 provides the information to a system (e.g., 3020).

[0195] In some embodiments, the system (e.g., 3110 shown in FIG. 3E) is an operating system hosted on device 3150. In some embodiments, the system (e.g., 3110 shown in FIG. 3E) is an external device (e.g., a server, a peripheral device, an accessory, and / or a personal computing device) that includes an operating system.

[0196] Referring to FIG. 3C and FIG. 3G, application 3160 obtains information (e.g., 3030). In some embodiments, the information obtained at 3030 includes positional information, time information, notification information, user information, environment information electronic device state information, weather information, media information, historical information, event information, hardware information, and / or motion information. In response to and / or after obtaining the information at 3030, application 3160 performs an operation with the information (e.g., 3040). In some embodiments, the operation performed at 3040 includes: providing a notification based on the information, sending a message based on the information, displaying the information, controlling a user interface of a fitness application based on the information, controlling a user interface of a health application based on the information, controlling a focus mode based on the information, setting a reminderbased on the information, adding a calendar entry based on the information, and / or calling an API of system 3110 based on the information.

[0197] In some embodiments, one or more steps of the method of FIG. 3B and / or the method of FIG. 3C is performed in response to a trigger. In some embodiments, the trigger includes detection of an event, a notification received from system 3110, a user input, and / or a response to a call to an API provided by system 3110.

[0198] In some embodiments, the instructions of application 3160, when executed, control device 3150 to perform the method of FIG. 3B and / or the method of FIG. 3C by calling an application programming interface (API) (e.g., API 3190) provided by system 3110. In some embodiments, application 3160 performs at least a portion of the method of FIG. 3B and / or the method of FIG. 3C without calling API 3190.

[0199] In some embodiments, one or more steps of the method of FIG. 3B and / or the method of FIG. 3C includes calling an API (e.g., API 3190) using one or more parameters defined by the API. In some embodiments, the one or more parameters include a constant, a key, a data structure, an object, an object class, a variable, a data type, a pointer, an array, a list or a pointer to a function or method, and / or another way to reference a data or other item to be passed via the API.

[0200] Referring to FIG. 3D, device 3150 is illustrated. In some embodiments, device 3150 is a personal computing device, a smart phone, a smart watch, a fitness tracker, a head mounted display (HMD) device, a media device, a communal device, a speaker, a television, and / or a tablet. As illustrated in FIG. 3D, device 3150 includes application 3160 and an operating system (e.g., system 3110 shown in FIG. 3E). Application 3160 includes application implementation module 3170 and API-calling module 3180. System 3110 includes API 3190 and implementation module 3100. It should be recognized that device 3150, application 3160, and / or system 3110 can include more, fewer, and / or different components than illustrated in FIGS. 3D and 3E.

[0201] In some embodiments, application implementation module 3170 includes a set of one or more instructions corresponding to one or more operations performed by application 3160. For example, when application 3160 is a messaging application, application implementation module 3170 can include operations to receive and send messages. In some embodiments, application implementation module 3170 communicates with API-calling module 3180 to communicate with system 3110 via API 3190 (shown in FIG. 3E).

[0202] In some embodiments, API 3190 is a software module (e.g., a collection of computer-readable instructions) that provides an interface that allows a different module (e.g., API-calling module 3180) to access and / or use one or more functions, methods, procedures, data structures, classes, and / or other services provided by implementation module 3100 of system 3110. For example, API-calling module 3180 can access a feature of implementation module 3100 through one or more API calls or invocations (e.g., embodied by a function or a method call) exposed by API 3190 (e.g., a software and / or hardware module that can receive API calls, respond to API calls, and / or send API calls) and can pass data and / or control information using one or more parameters via the API calls or invocations. In some embodiments, API 3190 allows application 3160 to use a service provided by a Software Development Kit (SDK) library. In some embodiments, application 3160 incorporates a call to a function or method provided by the SDK library and provided by API 3190 or uses data types or objects defined in the SDK library and provided by API 3190. In some embodiments, API-calling module 3180 makes an API call via API 3190 to access and use a feature of implementation module 3100 that is specified by API 3190. In such embodiments, implementation module 3100 can return a value via API 3190 to API- calling module 3180 in response to the API call. The value can report to application 3160 the capabilities or state of a hardware component of device 3150, including those related to aspects such as input capabilities and state, output capabilities and state, processing capability, power state, storage capacity and state, and / or communications capability. In some embodiments, API 3190 is implemented in part by firmware, microcode, or other low level logic that executes in part on the hardware component.

[0203] In some embodiments, API 3190 allows a developer of API-calling module 3180 (which can be a third-party developer) to leverage a feature provided by implementation module 3100. In such embodiments, there can be one or more API-calling modules (e.g., including API-calling module 3180) that communicate with implementation module 3100. In some embodiments, API 3190 allows multiple API-calling modules written in different programming languages to communicate with implementation module 3100 (e.g., API 3190 can include features for translating calls and returns between implementation module 3100 and API-calling module 3180) while API 3190 is implemented in terms of a specific programming language. In some embodiments, API-calling module 3180 calls APIs from different providers such as a set of APIs from an OS provider, another set of APIs from aplug-in provider, and / or another set of APIs from another provider (e.g., the provider of a software library) or creator of the another set of APIs.

[0204] Examples of API 3190 can include one or more of: a pairing API (e.g., for establishing secure connection, e.g., with an accessory), a device detection API (e.g., for locating nearby devices, e.g., media devices and / or smartphone), a payment API, a UIKit API (e.g., for generating user interfaces), a location detection API, a locator API, a maps API, a health sensor API, a sensor API, a messaging API, a push notification API, a streaming API, a collaboration API, a video conferencing API, an application store API, an advertising services API, a web browser API (e.g., WebKit API), a vehicle API, a networking API, a WiFi API, a Bluetooth API, an NFC API, a UWB API, a fitness API, a smart home API, contact transfer API, photos API, camera API, and / or image processing API. In some embodiments, the sensor API is an API for accessing data associated with a sensor of device 3150. For example, the sensor API can provide access to raw sensor data. For another example, the sensor API can provide data derived (and / or generated) from the raw sensor data. In some embodiments, the sensor data includes temperature data, image data, video data, audio data, heart rate data, IMU (inertial measurement unit) data, lidar data, location data, GPS data, and / or camera data. In some embodiments, the sensor includes one or more of an accelerometer, temperature sensor, infrared sensor, optical sensor, heartrate sensor, barometer, gyroscope, proximity sensor, temperature sensor, and / or biometric sensor.

[0205] In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 is a system (e.g., operating system and / or server system) software module (e.g., a collection of computer-readable instructions) that is constructed to perform an operation in response to receiving an API call via API 3190. In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 is constructed to provide an API response (via API 3190) as a result of processing an API call. By way of example, implementation module 3100 and API-calling module 3180 can each be any one of an operating system, a library, a device driver, an API, an application program, or other module. It should be understood that implementation module 3100 and API-calling module 3180 can be the same or different type of module from each other. In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 is embodied at least in part in firmware, microcode, or hardware logic.

[0206] In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 returns a value through API 3190 in response to an API call from API-calling module 3180. While API 3190 defines the syntax and result of an API call (e.g., how to invoke the API call and what the API call does),API 3190 might not reveal how implementation module 3100 accomplishes the function specified by the API call. Various API calls are transferred via the one or more application programming interfaces between API-calling module 3180 and implementation module 3100. Transferring the API calls can include issuing, initiating, invoking, calling, receiving, returning, and / or responding to the function calls or messages. In other words, transferring can describe actions by either of API-calling module 3180 or implementation module 3100. In some embodiments, a function call or other invocation of API 3190 sends and / or receives one or more parameters through a parameter list or other structure.

[0207] In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 provides more than one API, each providing a different view of or with different aspects of functionality implemented by implementation module 3100. For example, one API of implementation module 3100 can provide a first set of functions and can be exposed to third-party developers, and another API of implementation module 3100 can be hidden (e.g., not exposed) and provide a subset of the first set of functions and also provide another set of functions, such as testing or debugging functions which are not in the first set of functions. In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 calls one or more other components via an underlying API and thus is both an API-calling module and an implementation module. It should be recognized that implementation module 3100 can include additional functions, methods, classes, data structures, and / or other features that are not specified through API 3190 and are not available to API-calling module 3180. It should also be recognized that API-calling module 3180 can be on the same system as implementation module 3100 or can be located remotely and access implementation module 3100 using API 3190 over a network. In some embodiments, implementation module 3100, API 3190, and / or API-calling module 3180 is stored in a machine-readable medium, which includes any mechanism for storing information in a form readable by a machine (e.g., a computer or other data processing system). For example, a machine-readable medium can include magnetic disks, optical disks, random access memory; read only memory, and / or flash memory devices.

[0208] An application programming interface (API) is an interface between a first software process and a second software process that specifies a format for communication between the first software process and the second software process. Limited APIs (e.g., private APIs or partner APIs) are APIs that are accessible to a limited set of software processes (e.g., only software processes within an operating system or only software processes that are approved to access the limited APIs). Public APIs that are accessible to awider set of software processes. Some APIs enable software processes to communicate about or set a state of one or more input devices (e.g., one or more touch sensors, proximity sensors, visual sensors, motion / orientation sensors, pressure sensors, intensity sensors, sound sensors, wireless proximity sensors, biometric sensors, buttons, switches, rotatable elements, and / or external controllers). Some APIs enable software processes to communicate about and / or set a state of one or more output generation components (e.g., one or more audio output generation components, one or more display generation components, and / or one or more tactile output generation components). Some APIs enable particular capabilities (e.g., scrolling, handwriting, text entry, image editing, and / or image creation) to be accessed, performed, and / or used by a software process (e.g., generating outputs for use by a software process based on input from the software process). Some APIs enable content from a software process to be inserted into a template and displayed in a user interface that has a layout and / or behaviors that are specified by the template.

[0209] Many software platforms include a set of frameworks that provides the core objects and core behaviors that a software developer needs to build software applications that can be used on the software platform. Software developers use these objects to display content onscreen, to interact with that content, and to manage interactions with the software platform. Software applications rely on the set of frameworks for their basic behavior, and the set of frameworks provides many ways for the software developer to customize the behavior of the application to match the specific needs of the software application. Many of these core objects and core behaviors are accessed via an API. An API will typically specify a format for communication between software processes, including specifying and grouping available variables, functions, and protocols. An API call (sometimes referred to as an API request) will typically be sent from a sending software process to a receiving software process as a way to accomplish one or more of the following: the sending software process requesting information from the receiving software process (e.g., for the sending software process to take action on), the sending software process providing information to the receiving software process (e.g., for the receiving software process to take action on), the sending software process requesting action by the receiving software process, or the sending software process providing information to the receiving software process about action taken by the sending software process. Interaction with a device (e.g., using a user interface) will in some circumstances include the transfer and / or receipt of one or more API calls (e.g., multiple API calls) between multiple different software processes (e.g., different portions ofan operating system, an application and an operating system, or different applications) via one or more APIs (e.g., via multiple different APIs). For example, when an input is detected the direct sensor data is frequently processed into one or more input events that are provided (e.g., via an API) to a receiving software process that makes some determination based on the input events, and then sends (e.g., via an API) information to a software process to perform an operation (e.g., change a device state and / or user interface) based on the determination. While a determination and an operation performed in response could be made by the same software process, alternatively the determination could be made in a first software process and relayed (e.g., via an API) to a second software process, that is different from the first software process, that causes the operation to be performed by the second software process. Alternatively, the second software process could relay instructions (e.g., via an API) to a third software process that is different from the first software process and / or the second software process to perform the operation. It should be understood that some or all user interactions with a computer system could involve one or more API calls within a step of interacting with the computer system (e.g., between different software components of the computer system or between a software component of the computer system and a software component of one or more remote computer systems). It should be understood that some or all user interactions with a computer system could involve one or more API calls between steps of interacting with the computer system (e.g., between different software components of the computer system or between a software component of the computer system and a software component of one or more remote computer systems).

[0210] In some embodiments, the application can be any suitable type of application, including, for example, one or more of: a browser application, an application that functions as an execution environment for plug-ins, widgets or other applications, a fitness application, a health application, a digital payments application, a media application, a social network application, a messaging application, and / or a maps application.

[0211] In some embodiments, the application is an application that is pre-installed on the first computer system at purchase (e.g., a first-party application). In some embodiments, the application is an application that is provided to the first computer system via an operating system update file (e.g., a first-party application). In some embodiments, the application is an application that is provided via an application store. In some embodiments, the application store is pre-installed on the first computer system at purchase (e.g., a first-party application store) and allows download of one or more applications. In some embodiments,the application store is a third-party application store (e.g., an application store that is provided by another device, downloaded via a network, and / or read from a storage device). In some embodiments, the application is a third-party application (e.g., an app that is provided by an application store, downloaded via a network, and / or read from a storage device). In some embodiments, the application controls the first computer system to perform methods 700, 900, 1100, 1300, 1500, 1600, 1800, 1900, and / or 2100 (FIGS. 7A-7B, 9A-9B, 11, 13, 15, 16, 18, 19, and / or 21) by calling an application programming interface (API) provided by the system process using one or more parameters.

[0212] In some embodiments, exemplary APIs provided by the system process include one or more of: a pairing API (e.g., for establishing secure connection, e.g., with an accessory), a device detection API (e.g., for locating nearby devices, e.g., media devices and / or smartphone), a payment API, a UIKit API (e.g., for generating user interfaces), a location detection API, a locator API, a maps API, a health sensor API, a sensor API, a messaging API, a push notification API, a streaming API, a collaboration API, a video conferencing API, an application store API, an advertising services API, a web browser API (e.g., WebKit API), a vehicle API, a networking API, a WiFi API, a Bluetooth API, an NFC API, a UWB API, a fitness API, a smart home API, contact transfer API, a photos API, a camera API, and / or an image processing API.

[0213] In some embodiments, at least one API is a software module (e.g., a collection of computer-readable instructions) that provides an interface that allows a different module (e.g., API-calling module 3180) to access and use one or more functions, methods, procedures, data structures, classes, and / or other services provided by an implementation module of the system process. The API can define one or more parameters that are passed between the API-calling module and the implementation module. In some embodiments, API 3190 defines a first API call that can be provided by API-calling module 3180. The implementation module is a system software module (e.g., a collection of computer-readable instructions) that is constructed to perform an operation in response to receiving an API call via the API. In some embodiments, the implementation module is constructed to provide an API response (via the API) as a result of processing an API call. In some embodiments, the implementation module is included in the device (e.g., 3150) that runs the application. In some embodiments, the implementation module is included in an electronic device that is separate from the device that runs the application.

[0214] Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces that are, optionally, implemented on, for example, portable multifunction device 100.

[0215] FIG. 4A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device 100 in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are, optionally, implemented on device 300. In some embodiments, user interface 400 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:• Signal strength indicator(s) 402 for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals;• Time 404;• Bluetooth indicator 405;• Battery status indicator 406;• Tray 408 with icons for frequently used applications, such as: o Icon 416 for telephone module 138, labeled “Phone,” which optionally includes an indicator 414 of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages; o Icon 418 for e-mail client module 140, labeled “Mail,” which optionally includes an indicator 410 of the number of unread e-mails; o Icon 420 for browser module 147, labeled “Browser;” and o Icon 422 for video and music player module 152, also referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) module 152, labeled “iPod;” and• Icons for other applications, such as: o Icon 424 for IM module 141, labeled “Messages;” o Icon 426 for calendar module 148, labeled “Calendar;” o Icon 428 for image management module 144, labeled “Photos;” o Icon 430 for camera module 143, labeled “Camera;” o Icon 432 for online video module 155, labeled “Online Video;” o Icon 434 for stocks widget 149-2, labeled “Stocks;” o Icon 436 for map module 154, labeled “Maps;”o Icon 438 for weather widget 149-1, labeled “Weather;” o Icon 440 for alarm clock widget 149-4, labeled “Clock;” o Icon 442 for workout support module 142, labeled “Workout Support;” o Icon 444 for notes module 153, labeled “Notes;” and o Icon 446 for a settings application or module, labeled “Settings,” which provides access to settings for device 100 and its various applications 136.

[0216] It should be noted that the icon labels illustrated in FIG. 4A are merely exemplary. For example, icon 422 for video and music player module 152 is labeled “Music” or “Music Player.” Other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons. In some embodiments, a label for a respective application icon includes a name of an application corresponding to the respective application icon. In some embodiments, a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon.

[0217] FIG. 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device 300, FIG.3 A) with a touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., a tablet or touchpad 355, FIG. 3 A) that is separate from the display 450 (e.g., touch screen display 112). Device 300 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors 359) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 451 and / or one or more tactile output generators 357 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 300.

[0218] Although some of the examples that follow will be given with reference to inputs on touch screen display 112 (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in FIG. 4B. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 451 in FIG. 4B) has a primary axis (e.g., 452 in FIG. 4B) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g., 453 in FIG. 4B) on the display (e.g., 450). In accordance with these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e.g., contact 460 and contact 462 in FIG. 4B) with the touch-sensitive surface 451 at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display (e.g., in FIG. 4B, contact 460 corresponds to 468 and contact 462 corresponds to 470). In this way, user inputs (e.g., contacts 460 and 462, and movements thereof) detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 451 in FIG. 4B) are used by the device to manipulate the user interface on the display (e.g., 450 in FIG. 4B) of the multifunction devicewhen the touch-sensitive surface is separate from the display. It should be understood that similar methods are, optionally, used for other user interfaces described herein.

[0219] Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures), it should be understood that, in some embodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse-based input or stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact). As another example, a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are simultaneously detected, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously.

[0220] FIG. 5 A illustrates exemplary personal electronic device 500. Device 500 includes body 502. In some embodiments, device 500 can include some or all of the features described with respect to devices 100 and 300 (e.g., FIGS. 1 A-4B). In some embodiments, device 500 has touch-sensitive display screen 504, hereafter touch screen 504. Alternatively, or in addition to touch screen 504, device 500 has a display and a touch-sensitive surface. As with devices 100 and 300, in some embodiments, touch screen 504 (or the touch-sensitive surface) optionally includes one or more intensity sensors for detecting intensity of contacts (e.g., touches) being applied. The one or more intensity sensors of touch screen 504 (or the touch-sensitive surface) can provide output data that represents the intensity of touches. The user interface of device 500 can respond to touches based on their intensity, meaning that touches of different intensities can invoke different user interface operations on device 500.

[0221] Exemplary techniques for detecting and processing touch intensity are found, for example, in related applications: International Patent Application Serial No.PCT / US2013 / 040061, titled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Displaying User Interface Objects Corresponding to an Application,” filed May 8, 2013, published as WIPO Publication No. WO / 2013 / 169849, and International Patent Application Serial No. PCT / US2013 / 069483, titled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Transitioning Between Touch Input to Display Output Relationships,” filed November 11, 2013, published as WIPO Publication No. WO / 2014 / 105276, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

[0222] In some embodiments, device 500 has one or more input mechanisms 506 and 508. Input mechanisms 506 and 508, if included, can be physical. Examples of physical input mechanisms include push buttons and rotatable mechanisms. In some embodiments, device 500 has one or more attachment mechanisms. Such attachment mechanisms, if included, can permit attachment of device 500 with, for example, hats, eyewear, earrings, necklaces, shirts, jackets, bracelets, watch straps, chains, trousers, belts, shoes, purses, backpacks, and so forth. These attachment mechanisms permit device 500 to be worn by a user.

[0223] FIG. 5B depicts exemplary personal electronic device 500. In some embodiments, device 500 can include some or all of the components described with respect to FIGS. 1 A, IB, and 3 A. Device 500 has bus 512 that operatively couples I / O section 514 with one or more computer processors 516 and memory 518. VO section 514 can be connected to display screen 504, which can have touch-sensitive component 522 and, optionally, intensity sensor 524 (e.g., contact intensity sensor). In addition, I / O section 514 can be connected with communication unit 530 for receiving application and operating system data, using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, near field communication (NFC), cellular, and / or other wireless communication techniques. Device 500 can include input mechanisms 506 and / or 508. Input mechanism 506 is, optionally, a rotatable input device or a depressible and rotatable input device, for example. Input mechanism 508 is, optionally, a button, in some examples.

[0224] Input mechanism 508 is, optionally, a microphone, in some examples. Personal electronic device 500 optionally includes various sensors, such as GPS sensor 532, accelerometer 534, directional sensor 540 (e.g., compass), gyroscope 536, motion sensor 538, and / or a combination thereof, all of which can be operatively connected to VO section 514.

[0225] Memory 518 of personal electronic device 500 can include one or more non- transitory computer-readable storage mediums, for storing computer-executable instructions, which, when executed by one or more computer processors 516, for example, can cause the computer processors to perform the techniques described below, including processes 700, 900, 1100, 1300, 1500, 1600, 1800, 1900, and / or 2100 (FIGS. 7A-7B, 9A-9B, 11, 13, 15, 16, 18, 19, and / or 21). A computer-readable storage medium can be any medium that can tangibly contain or store computer-executable instructions for use by or in connection with the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device. In some examples, the storage medium is a transitory computer-readable storage medium. In some examples, the storage medium is a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium. The non-transitorycomputer-readable storage medium can include, but is not limited to, magnetic, optical, and / or semiconductor storages. Examples of such storage include magnetic disks, optical discs based on CD, DVD, or Blu-ray technologies, as well as persistent solid-state memory such as flash, solid-state drives, and the like. Personal electronic device 500 is not limited to the components and configuration of FIG. 5B, but can include other or additional components in multiple configurations.

[0226] As used here, the term “affordance” refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object that is, optionally, displayed on the display screen of devices 100, 300, and / or 500 (FIGS. 1 A, 3 A, and 5A-5B). For example, an image (e.g., icon), a button, and text (e.g., hyperlink) each optionally constitute an affordance.

[0227] As used herein, the term “focus selector” refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other location marker, the cursor acts as a “focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad 355 in FIG. 3 A or touch-sensitive surface 451 in FIG. 4B) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations that include a touch screen display (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 in FIG. 1 A or touch screen 112 in FIG. 4 A) that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch screen display, a detected contact on the touch screen acts as a “focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations, focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); in these implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions of the user interface. Without regard to the specific form taken by the focus selector, the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user’s intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interface with which the user is intending to interact). For example, the location of a focusselector (e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box) over a respective button while a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of the device).

[0228] As used in the specification and claims, the term “characteristic intensity” of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact.In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, and / or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact). A characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally, based on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent maximum of the intensities of the contact, or the like. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds optionally includes a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold. In this example, a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation, a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results in a second operation, and a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second threshold results in a third operation. In some embodiments, a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective operation or forgo performing the respective operation), rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation.

[0229] As described herein, content is automatically generated by one or more computers in response to a request to generate the content. The automatically-generated content is optionally generated on-device (e.g., generated at least in part by a computer system at which a request to generate the content is received) and / or generated off-device (e.g., generated at least in part by one or more nearby computers that are available via a local network or one or more computers that are available via the internet). This automatically-generated content optionally includes visual content (e.g., images, graphics, and / or video), audio content, and / or text content.

[0230] In some embodiments, novel automatically-generated content that is generated via one or more artificial intelligence (Al) processes is referred to as generative content (e.g., generative images, generative graphics, generative video, generative audio, and / or generative text). Generative content is typically generated by an Al process based on a prompt that is provided to the Al process. An Al process typically uses one or more Al models to generate an output based on an input. An Al process optionally includes one or more pre-processing steps to adjust the input before it is used by the Al model to generate an output (e.g., adjustment to a user-provided prompt, creation of a system-generated prompt, and / or Al model selection). An Al process optionally includes one or more post-processing steps to adjust the output by the Al model (e.g., passing Al model output to a different Al model, upscaling, downscaling, cropping, formatting, and / or adding or removing metadata) before the output of the Al model used for other purposes such as being provided to a different software process for further processing or being presented (e.g., visually or audibly) to a user. An Al process that generates generative content is sometimes referred to as a generative Al process.

[0231] A prompt for generating generative content can include one or more of: one or more words (e.g., a natural language prompt that is written or spoken), one or more images, one or more drawings, and / or one or more videos. Al processes can include machine learning models including neural networks. Neural networks can include transformer-based deep neural networks such as large language models (LLMs). Generative pre-trained transformer models are a type of LLM that can be effective at generating novel generative content based on a prompt. Some Al processes use a prompt that includes text to generate either different generative text, generative audio content, and / or generative visual content. Some Al processes use a prompt that includes visual content and / or an audio content to generate generative text (e.g., a transcription of audio and / or a description of the visualcontent). Some multi-modal Al processes use a prompt that includes multiple types of content (e.g., text, images, audio, video, and / or other sensor data) to generate generative content. A prompt sometimes also includes values for one or more parameters indicating an importance of various parts of the prompt. Some prompts include a structured set of instructions that can be understood by an Al process that include phrasing, a specified style, relevant context (e.g., starting point content and / or one or more examples), and / or a role for the Al process.

[0232] Generative content is generally based on the prompt but is not deterministically selected from pre-generated content and is, instead, generated using the prompt as a starting point. In some embodiments, pre-existing content (e.g., audio, text, and / or visual content) is used as part of the prompt for creating generative content (e.g., the pre-existing content is used as a starting point for creating the generative content). For example, a prompt could request that a block of text be summarized or rewritten in a different tone, and the output would be generative text that is summarized or written in the different tone. Similarly, a prompt could request that visual content be modified to include or exclude content specified by a prompt (e.g., removing an identified feature in the visual content, adding a feature to the visual content that is described in a prompt, changing a visual style of the visual content, and / or creating additional visual elements outside of a spatial or temporal boundary of the visual content that are based on the visual content). In some embodiments, a random or pseudo-random seed is used as part of the prompt for creating generative content (e.g., the random or pseud-random seed content is used as a starting point for creating the generative content). For example, when generating an image from a diffusion model, a random noise pattern is iteratively denoised based on the prompt to generate an image that is based on the prompt. While specific types of Al processes have been described herein, it should be understood that a variety of different Al processes could be used to generate generative content based on a prompt.

[0233] Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (“UI”) and associated processes that are implemented on an electronic device, such as portable multifunction device 100, device 300, or device 500.

[0234] FIGS. 6A-6AG illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing photographic styles, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIGS. 7A-7B.

[0235] In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., input 650a, 650b, 650c, 650d, 650e, 650f, 650g, 650h, 650i, 650j, 650k, 6501, 650m, 650n, 650o, 650p, 650q, 650r, 650s, 650t, 650u, 650v, 650w, 650x, 650y, 650z, 650aa, 650ab, 650ac, 650ad, 650ae, 650af, 650ag, 650ah, 650ai, 650aj, 650ak, 650al, 650am, 650an) is or includes a touch input (e.g., a tap gesture and / or a swipe gesture). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., input 650a, 650b, 650c, 650d, 650e, 650f, 650g, 650h, 650i, 650j, 650k, 6501, 650m, 650n, 650o, 650p, 650q, 650r, 650s, 650t, 650u, 650v, 650w, 650x, 650y, 650z, 650aa, 650ab, 650ac, 650ad, 650ae, 650af, 650ag, 650ah, 650ai, 650aj, 650ak, 650al, 650am, 650an) is or includes a voice input (e.g., a voice command to select a user interface element or to activate a feature or perform a function, such as a feature or function associated with a user interface element). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., input 650a, 650b, 650c, 650d, 650e, 650f, 650g, 650h, 650i, 650j, 650k, 6501, 650m, 650n, 650o, 650p, 650q, 650r, 650s, 650t, 650u, 650v, 650w, 650x, 650y, 650z, 650aa, 650ab, 650ac, 650ad, 650ae, 650af, 650ag, 650ah, 650ai, 650aj, 650ak, 650al, 650am, 650an) is or includes an air gesture (e.g., an air gesture to select a user interface element or to activate a feature or perform a function, such as a feature or function associated with a user interface element). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., input 650a, 650b, 650c, 650d, 650e, 650f, 650g, 650h, 650i, 650j, 650k, 6501, 650m, 650n, 650o, 650p, 650q, 650r, 650s, 650t, 650u, 650v, 650w, 650x, 650y, 650z, 650aa, 650ab, 650ac, 650ad, 650ae, 650af, 650ag, 650ah, 650ai, 650aj, 650ak, 650al, 650am, 650an) is or includes activation (e.g., a press, a rotation, and / or a movement) of a hardware device (e.g., a button, a rotatable input mechanism, a rotatable and depressible input mechanism, a mouse, a mouse button, a trackpad, a trackpad button, a button of a remote control, and / or a joystick). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., input 650a, 650b, 650c, 650d, 650e, 650f, 650g, 650h, 650i, 650j, 650k, 6501, 650m, 650n, 650o, 650p, 650q, 650r, 650s, 650t, 650u, 650v, 650w, 650x, 650y, 650z, 650aa, 650ab, 650ac, 650ad, 650ae, 650af, 650ag, 650ah, 650ai, 650aj, 650ak, 650al, 650am, 650an) as a touch and drag gesture includes an air gesture (e.g., an air gesture including a pinch and / or movement) and / or a click and drag gesture (e.g., a click of a mouse button and / or a trackpad and / or movement while holding a press of a mouse button and / or trackpad) of a mouse and / or trackpad. In some embodiments, any of the user interface elements described as being selected herein (e.g., an icon, affordance, button, and / or selectable option) is selected by activating a hardware device while the user interface element is in focus (e.g., highlighted, bolded, outlined, visually distinguished from other user interface elements, and / or located at or near a cursor).

[0236] FIG. 6A illustrates computer system 600 displaying, via display 602, camera user interface 604. Camera user interface 604 corresponds to an application that enables computer system 600 to capture images and / or videos using a camera of (e.g., one or more cameras that are in communication with) computer system 600. Camera user interface 604 includes field of view representation 604a that includes a visual representation of an area surrounding computer system 600 and that is within a field of view of the camera of computer system 600. Camera user interface 604 also includes capture user interface object 604b. In response to detecting user input corresponding to capture user interface object 604b, computer system 600 initiates capturing an image and / or video that is within the field of view of the camera. Camera user interface 604 also includes photographic mode region 604c and options user interface object 604d. In some embodiments, in response to detecting user input corresponding to photographic mode region 604c, computer system 600 transitions among respective modes for capturing different types of photos and / or videos.

[0237] At FIG. 6A, computer system 600 detects user input 650a (e.g., a tap input and / or a touch input) corresponding to selection of options user interface object 604d. In response to detecting user input 650a, computer system 600 displays camera user interface 604 with settings region 606, as shown at FIG. 6B. In some embodiments, at FIG. 6 A, computer system 600 detects user input 650b (e.g., a swipe up input and / or a touch input) corresponding to camera user interface 604. In some embodiments, in response to detecting user input 650b, computer system 600 displays settings region 606 on camera user interface 604, as shown at FIG. 6B.

[0238] At FIG. 6B, computer system 600 displays camera user interface 604, which includes display of settings region 606 replacing display of photographic mode region 604c. In some embodiments, computer system 600 does not replace display of photographic mode region 604c with settings region 606 and instead displays both photographic mode region 604c and settings region 606 concurrently on camera user interface 604.

[0239] At FIG. 6B, settings region 606 includes settings user interface objects 606a-606f corresponding to respective settings for capturing images and / or videos using the camera of computer system 600. For instance, at FIG. 6B, settings user interface object 606f corresponds to a styles setting for images and / or videos captured using the camera of computer system 600. In some embodiments, a style of an image and / or video captured using the camera of computer system 600 includes computer system 600 applying different combinations of tone, saturation, color temperature, brightness, contrast, and / or warmth toimages and / or videos that are being captured and / or have been captured using the camera of computer system 600.

[0240] In some embodiments, while computer system 600 displays camera user interface 604 and in response to selection of a respective style, computer system 600 is configured to apply the respective style to images and / or videos captured via the camera (e.g., in response to detecting user input corresponding to capture user interface object 604b). As set forth below with reference to FIGS. 6S-6Y, computer system 600 is also configured to apply a respective style to an image and / or video that has already been captured via the camera of computer system 600 and / or an image and / or video that is otherwise accessible to computer system 600 (e.g., stored in a media library of computer system 600 and / or accessible via a server).

[0241] At FIG. 6B, computer system 600 detects user input 650c (e.g., a tap input and / or a touch input) corresponding to settings user interface object 606f. In response to detecting user input 650c, computer system 600 displays styles user interface 608, as shown at FIG. 6C.

[0242] At FIG. 6C, styles user interface 608 includes field of view representation 608a, capture user interface object 608b, and style region 610. Similar to field of view representation 604a, field of view representation 608a includes a visual representation of an area surrounding computer system 600 and that is within a field of view of the camera of computer system 600. Computer system 600 is configured to initiate capturing an image and / or video that is within the field of view of the camera in response to detecting user input corresponding to capture user interface object 608b.

[0243] Style region 610 includes style user interface objects 610a-610d. Style user interface objects 610a-610d correspond to respective styles that can be applied to images and / or videos captured via the camera of computer system 600. For instance, style user interface object 610a corresponds to a standard style that includes a first tone (e.g., a default tone), a first saturation (e.g., a default saturation), and / or a first color temperature (e.g., a default color temperature).

[0244] Style user interface objects 610a-610d include graphical representation 612 of the respective style corresponding to style user interface objects 610a-610d. Graphical representation 612 is a two dimensional grid and / or chart that is defined by first axis 612a and second axis 612b. As set forth below, first axis 612a represents values of tone and secondaxis 612b represents values of saturation. Graphical representation 612 also includes indicator 612c that represents a currently selected value of tone and saturation for the respective style. In other words, a position of indicator 612c relative to first axis 612a indicates a current value of tone and a position of indicator 612c relative to second axis 612b indicates a current value of saturation for the respective style. While the discussion of FIGS. 6A-6AG describes tone and saturation as the parameters represented by graphical representation 612, in some embodiments, graphical representation 612 represents other parameters, such as color temperature, contrast, brightness, and / or warmth.

[0245] At FIG. 6C, graphical representation 612 is different for each of style user interface objects 610a-610d indicating that different styles can be applied to images and / or videos captured via the camera of computer system 600. In some embodiments, the styles corresponding to style user interface objects 610a-610d are defined by computer system 600 (e.g., the styles are pre-set and / or default styles of computer system 600). In some embodiments, the styles corresponding to style user interface objects 610a-610d are user defined. In some embodiments, the styles corresponding to style user interface objects 610a- 610d include a combination of styles defined by computer system 600 and user-defined styles. As set forth below, computer system 600 is configured to modify a style corresponding to a respective style user interface object 610a-610d in response to one or more user inputs.

[0246] At FIG. 6C, style user interface object 610a is currently selected, and thus, computer system 600 is configured to apply the respective style corresponding to style user interface object 610a to an image and / or video that is captured via the camera of computer system 600. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays style user interface object 610a at a size that is larger than style user interface objects 610b-610d based on a determination that and / or when style user interface object 610a is currently selected. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays style user interface object 610a with an appearance that is different from the appearance of style user interface objects 610b-610d based on a determination that and / or when style user interface object 610a is currently selected. For example, in some embodiments, computer system 600 displays style user interface object 610a with an outline, with a different color than style user interface objects 610b-610d, and / or with an emphasis when style user interface object 610a is currently selected.

[0247] In response to detecting user input corresponding to (e.g., a tap input on, a swipe input on, and / or a touch input directed to) a different style user interface object (e.g., style user interface objects 61 Ob-61 Od), computer system 600 selects a respective style user interface object based on the input and is configured to apply the respective style corresponding to the selected respective style user interface object to captured images and / or videos. As set forth below, computer system 600 is also configured to apply the respective style to field of view representation 608a (e.g., display field of view representation 608a with a respective tone, saturation, and / or color temperature corresponding to the selected style) so that the user of computer system 600 can preview the style and determine whether to apply the style to images and / or videos captured via the camera of computer system 600 (e.g., or to select a different style).

[0248] In some embodiments, in response to detecting user input corresponding to style region 610, computer system 600 displays additional style user interface objects (e.g., style user interface object 610e shown at FIGS. 6D and 6E). For instance, at FIG. 6C, computer system 600 detects user input 650d (e.g., a swipe input and / or a touch input) corresponding to style region 610. In response to detecting user input 650d, computer system 600 moves and / or translates style user interface objects 610a-610d and displays style user interface object 610e, as shown at FIG. 6D. In addition, in response to detecting user input 650d, computer system 600 selects style user interface object 610b and de-selects style user interface object 610a.

[0249] At FIG. 6D, computer system displays styles user interface 608, where field of view representation 608a includes a modified appearance (e.g., as compared to the appearance of field of view representation 608a at FIG. 6C) based on the style corresponding to style user interface object 610b, as indicated by first hatching of 608a at FIG. 6D. Style user interface object 610b includes indicator 612c at a different location relative to first axis 612a and second axis 612b as compared to style user interface object 610a. Computer system 600 applies the style corresponding to style user interface object 610b so that an image and / or video captured by the camera of computer system 600 (e.g., in response to detecting user input corresponding to capture user interface object 608b) includes the style corresponding to style user interface object 610b.

[0250] At FIG. 6D, computer system 600 detects user input 650e (e.g., a swipe input and / or a touch input) corresponding to style region 610. In response to detecting user input 650e, computer system 600 moves and / or translates style user interface objects 610a-610e, asshown at FIG. 6E. In addition, in response to detecting user input 650e, computer system 600 selects style user interface object 610c and de-selects style user interface object 610b.

[0251] At FIG. 6E, computer system displays styles user interface 608, where field of view representation 608a includes a modified appearance (e.g., as compared to the appearance of field of view representation 608a at FIGS. 6C and 6D) based on the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c, as indicated by second hatching of 608a at FIG. 6E. Style user interface object 610c includes indicator 612c positioned at a different location relative to first axis 612a and second axis 612b as compared to style user interface objects 610a and 610b. At FIG. 6E, computer system 600 applies the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c so that an image and / or video captured by the camera of computer system 600 includes the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c.

[0252] As set forth above, in some embodiments, style user interface objects 610a-610e correspond to styles that are user-defined. In other words, in some embodiments, one or more of style user interface objects 610a-610e correspond to styles that include parameters selected by and / or customized via user input. At FIG. 6E, computer system 600 detects user input 650f (e.g., a tap input and / or a touch input) corresponding to style user interface object 610c. In response to detecting user input 650f, computer system 600 initiates an editing mode that enables computer system 600 to receive inputs to modify and / or adjust parameters of the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c. As shown at FIG. 6F, computer system 600 displays style editing user interface 614 in response to detecting user input 650f.

[0253] At FIG. 6F, style editing user interface 614 includes field of view representation 614a, tone value indicator 614b, saturation value indicator 614c, graphical representation 616, and slider 617. Similar to field of view representations 604a and 608a, field of view representation 614a includes a visual representation of an area surrounding computer system 600 and that is within a field of view of the camera of computer system 600. Field of view representation 614a includes the same appearance as 608a shown at FIG. 6E because the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c is selected, as indicated by second hatching of 614a at FIG. 6F. Style editing user interface 614 does not include capture user interface object 608b, such that computer system 600 is not configured to capture an image and / or video while displaying style editing user interface 614. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays capture user interface object 608c concurrently with graphical representation 616, such that computer system 600 is configured to capture images and / or videos while displaying style editing user interface 614. As set forth below, computer system600 is configured to adjust a color temperature of the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c in response to detecting user input corresponding to slider 617.

[0254] Tone value indicator 614b includes a textual and / or numerical indication of a currently selected tone value. Similarly, saturation value indicator 614c includes a textual and / or numerical indication of a currently selected saturation value. While tone value indicator 614b and saturation value indicator 614c are displayed below field of view representation 614a at FIG. 6F, in some embodiments, computer system 600 overlays tone value indicator 614b and / or saturation value indicator 614c onto field of view representation 614a. Computer system 600 is configured to modify, adjust, change, and / or update the currently selected tone value and / or the currently selected saturation value in response to detecting user input corresponding to graphical representation 616. Computer system 600 also updates tone value indicator 614b and / or saturation value indicator 614c in response to detecting user input corresponding to graphical representation 616. As set forth above, while the description of FIGS. 6A-6AG relates to graphical representation 616 corresponding to respective tone and saturation values, in some embodiments, computer system 600 is configured to cause adjustment of other parameters of a style in response to detecting user input corresponding to graphical representation 616.

[0255] As set forth below, computer system 600 is configured to concurrently adjust values of tone and saturation in response to user input corresponding to graphical representation 616. Computer system 600 is also configured to individually adjust a value of tone (e.g., without adjusting a value of saturation) and / or individually adjust a value of saturation (e.g., without adjusting a value of tone) in response to user input corresponding to graphical representation 616.

[0256] Graphical representation 616 includes first axis 616a corresponding to values of tone and second axis 616b corresponding to values of saturation. In addition, graphical representation 616 includes indicator 616c indicating a currently selected value of tone and a currently selected value of saturation, which is represented by a location of indicator 616c relative to first axis 616a and second axis 616b. Computer system 600 is configured to adjust, modify, and / or change the values of tone and / or saturation in response to user input corresponding to graphical representation 616. In some embodiments, the user input corresponding to graphical representation 616 includes a touch input that includes movement from an initial touch location to a second location. In some embodiments, the user input corresponding to graphical representation 616 includes a touch and / or tap input selecting anew position and / or location of indicator 616c relative to first axis 616a and / or second axis 616b.

[0257] For example, at FIG. 6F, computer system 600 detects user input 650g corresponding to graphical representation 616. User input 650g includes a request to adjust one or more parameters of the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c. At FIG. 6F, user input 650g is a touch gesture that includes movement while maintaining contact of the touch gesture (e.g., a swipe gesture). In response to detecting user input 650g, computer system 600 adjusts a position and / or location of indicator 616c in a direction along first axis 616a and / or second axis 616b that is based on the movement of user input 650g. For instance, at FIG. 6F, user input 650g includes movement in a direction that is parallel to first axis 616a and does not include movement in a direction along second axis 616b. In response to detecting user input 650g, computer system 600 adjusts a position of indicator 616c along first axis 616a, as shown at FIG. 6G. In addition, computer system adjusts a current value of tone for the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c in response to detecting user input 650g. For instance, as shown at FIG. 6G, field of view representation 614a includes third hatching indicating that an appearance of field of view representation 614a has been modified based on the change in the current value of tone. In addition, at FIG. 6G, tone value indicator 614b has been updated to indicate that the tone value has been changed to a value of 50 from a value of -25 (e.g., the tone value at FIG. 6F).

[0258] While user input 650g is a touch gesture that includes movement while maintaining contact with display 602, computer system 600 is also configured to adjust one or more parameters of the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c in response to other types of user inputs. For instance, at FIG. 6F, computer system 600 detects user input 650h corresponding to graphical representation 616. User input 650h is a tap gesture at a position of graphical representation 616 and does not include movement. In response to detecting user input 650h, computer system 600 adjusts and / or moves indicator 616c to a location of graphical representation 616 that is based on a location of user input 650h with respect to first axis 616a and second axis 616b of graphical representation 616. As shown at FIG. 6F, the location of user input 650h forms a line with a current position of indicator 616c that is parallel to first axis 616a. In response to detecting user input 650h, computer system 600 moves indicator 616c to an updated position on graphical representation 616 that includes movement along first axis 616a, but does not include movement along second axis 616b.

[0259] In addition, in response to detecting user input 650h, computer system 600 updates the current value of tone, as shown at FIG. 6G. For instance, as shown at FIG. 6G, field of view representation 614a includes the third hatching indicating that an appearance of field of view representation 614a has been modified based on the change in the current value of tone. In addition, at FIG. 6G, tone value indicator 614b has been updated to indicate that the tone value has been changed to a value of 50 from a value of -25 (e.g., the tone value at FIG. 6F).

[0260] At FIG. 6F, computer system 600 outputs tactile feedback 651a in response to detecting user input 650g and / or user input 650h corresponding to graphical representation 616. In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 6F, computer system 600 outputs tactile feedback 651a in response to detecting an initial contact of user input 650g corresponding to graphical representation 616. Accordingly, computer system 600 provides confirmation that the user is interacting with graphical representation 616 to adjust one or more parameters of the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c.

[0261] Further still, in response to detecting user input 650g and / or user input 650h, computer system 600 adjusts and / or modifies an appearance of graphical representation 616. For instance, at FIG. 6F, computer system 600 displays graphical representation 616 with an appearance indicated by a first shading pattern. In response to detecting user input 650g and / or user input 650h, computer system 600 displays graphical representation 616 with an appearance indicated by a second shading pattern, as shown at FIG. 6G. In some embodiments, the appearance of graphical representation 616 is based on the current value of tone and / or the current value of saturation, indicated by the position of indicator 616c within graphical representation 616. For instance, in some embodiments, computer system 600 adjusts a tone of one or more colors of graphical representation 616 in response to detecting user input corresponding to a request to change a current value of tone. In some embodiments, computer system 600 adjusts a saturation of one or more colors of graphical representation 616 in response to detecting user input corresponding to a request to change a current value of saturation. In some embodiments, computer system 600 adjusts the tone and saturation of one or more colors of graphical representation 616 in response to detecting user input corresponding to a request to change a current value of tone and a current value of saturation. In some embodiments, computer system 600 updates and / or modifies an appearance (e.g., a color, a color temperature, a shading, a brightness, a tone, and / or a saturation) of slider 617 in response to detecting user input 650g and / or user input 650h.

[0262] At FIG. 6G, computer system 600 displays graphical representation 616 with indicator 616c at an updated location based on a location and / or movement of user input 650g and / or user input 650h. As set forth above, because user input 650g and user input 650h include inputs requesting to change the location of indicator 616c along first axis 616a, but not along second axis 616b, indicator 616c is displayed at a location that is to the right of the location of indicator 616c at FIG. 6F and moves along a path that is parallel to first axis 616a. Computer system 600 updates tone value indicator 614b to indicate the new current value of tone based on detecting user input 650g and / or user input 650h. However, computer system 600 does not update saturation value indicator 614c (e.g., computer system 600 maintains an appearance and / or a value associated with saturation value indicator 614c) because computer system 600 did not change the location of indicator 616c relative to second axis 616b in response to detecting user input 650g and / or user input 650h.

[0263] At FIG. 6G, computer system 600 outputs tactile feedback 651b in response to detecting an end of user input 650g and / or user input 650h. For instance, in response to detecting that contact associated with user input 650g and / or user input 650h has ended (e.g., the user lifts their finger from display 602), computer system 600 outputs tactile feedback 651b to confirm an end of user input 650g and / or user input 650h.

[0264] At FIG. 6G, computer system 600 detects user input 650i corresponding to graphical representation 616. User input 650i includes a request to adjust one or more parameters of the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c. At FIG. 6G, user input 650i is a touch gesture that includes movement while maintaining contact of the touch gesture. In response to detecting user input 650i, computer system 600 adjusts a position and / or location of indicator 616c in a direction along first axis 616a and / or second axis 616b that is based on the movement of user input 650i. For instance, at FIG. 6G, user input 650i includes movement in a direction that is parallel to second axis 616b and does not include movement in a direction along first axis 616a. In response to detecting user input 650i, computer system 600 adjusts a position of indicator 616c along second axis 616b, as shown at FIG. 6H. In addition, computer system 600 adjusts a current value of saturation for the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c in response to detecting user input 650i. For instance, as shown at FIG. 6H, field of view representation 614a includes fourth hatching indicating that an appearance of field of view representation 614a has been modified based on the change in the current value of saturation. In addition, at FIG. 6H, saturation valueindicator 614c has been updated to indicate that the saturation value has been changed to a value of 50 from a value of 0 (e.g., the saturation value at FIG. 6G).

[0265] While user input 650i is a touch gesture that includes movement while maintaining contact with display 602, computer system 600 is also configured to adjust one or more parameters of the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c in response to other types of user inputs. For instance, at FIG. 6G, computer system 600 detects user input 650j corresponding to graphical representation 616. User input 650j is a tap gesture at a position of graphical representation 616 and does not include movement. In response to detecting user input 650j, computer system 600 adjusts and / or moves indicator 616c to a location of graphical representation 616 that is based on a location of user input 650j with respect to first axis 616a and second axis 616b of graphical representation 616. As shown at FIG. 6G, the location of user input 650j forms a line with a current position of indicator 616c that is parallel to second axis 616b. In response to detecting user input 650j, computer system 600 moves indicator 616c to an updated position on graphical representation 616 that includes movement along second axis 616b, but does not include movement along first axis 616a.

[0266] At FIG. 6G, computer system 600 outputs tactile feedback 651c in response to detecting user input 650i and / or user input 650j corresponding to graphical representation 616. In some embodiments, computer system 600 outputs tactile feedback 651c in response to detecting an initial contact of user input 650i corresponding to graphical representation 616. Accordingly, computer system 600 provides confirmation that the user is interacting with graphical representation 616 to adjust one or more parameters of the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c.

[0267] Further still, in response to detecting user input 650i and / or user input 650j, computer system 600 adjusts and / or modifies an appearance of graphical representation 616. For instance, at FIG. 6G, computer system 600 displays graphical representation 616 with an appearance indicated by a second shading pattern. In response to detecting user input 650i and / or user input 650j, computer system 600 displays graphical representation 616 with an appearance indicated by a third shading pattern, as shown at FIG. 6H. As set forth above, in some embodiments, the appearance of graphical representation 616 is based on the current value of tone and / or the current value of saturation, indicated by the position of indicator 616c within graphical representation 616.

[0268] At FIG. 6H, computer system 600 displays graphical representation 616 with indicator 616c at an updated location based on a location and / or movement of user input 650i and / or user input 65 Qj . As set forth above, because user input 65 Oi and user input 65 Qj include inputs requesting to change the location of indicator 616c along second axis 616b, but not first axis 616a, indicator 616c is displayed at a location that is above the location of indicator 616c at FIG. 6G and at a location that is the same distance from second axis 616b as compared to the location of indicator 616c at FIG. 6G. Computer system 600 updates saturation value indicator 614c to indicate the new current value of saturation that is set based on detecting user input 650i and / or user input 650j. However, computer system 600 does not update tone value indicator 614b (e.g., computer system 600 maintains an appearance and / or a value associated with tone value indicator 614b) because computer system 600 did not change the location of indicator 616c relative to first axis 616a in response to detecting user input 650i and / or user input 650j.

[0269] At FIG. 6H, computer system 600 outputs tactile feedback 65 Id in response to detecting an end of user input 65 Oi and / or user input 65 Qj . For instance, in response to detecting that contact associated with user input 650i and / or user input 650j has ended (e.g., the user lifts their finger from display 602), computer system 600 outputs tactile feedback 65 Id to confirm an end of user input 650i and / or user input 650j .

[0270] At FIG. 6H, computer system 600 detects user input 650k corresponding to graphical representation 616. User input 650k includes a request to adjust one or more parameters of the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c. At FIG. 6H, user input 650k is a touch gesture that includes movement while maintaining contact of the touch gesture. In response to detecting user input 650k, computer system 600 adjusts a position and / or location of indicator 616c in a direction along first axis 616a and / or second axis 616b that is based on the movement of user input 650k. For instance, at FIG. 6H, user input 650k includes movement in a direction along both first axis 616a and second axis 616b. In response to detecting user input 650k, computer system 600 adjusts a position of indicator 616c along both first axis 616a and second axis 616b, as shown at FIG. 61. In addition, computer system 600 adjusts a current value of tone and adjusts a current value of saturation for the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c in response to detecting user input 650k. For instance, as shown at FIG. 61, field of view representation 614a includes fifth hatching indicating that an appearance of field of view representation 614a has been modified based on the change in the current value of tone and the current value of saturation. Inaddition, at FIG. 61, tone value indicator 614b has been updated to indicate that the tone value has been changed to a value of -12 from a value of 50 (e.g., the tone value at FIG. 6H) and saturation value indicator 614c has been updated to indicate that the saturation value has been changed to a value of -12 from a value of 50 (e.g., the saturation value at FIG. 6H). In response to detecting user input 650k, computer system 600 outputs tactile feedback 65 le.

[0271] At FIG. 61, computer system 600 detects that contact associated with user input 650k is maintained (e.g., movement of user input 650k is still occurring at FIG. 61). Based on a determination that user input 650k includes movement across a respective portion of graphical representation 616, computer system 600 outputs tactile feedback 65 If. For instance, at FIG. 61, computer system 600 detects that user input 650k includes movement across a center line of graphical representation 616 represented by first axis 616a. Based on a determination that user input 650k includes movement across the center line of graphical representation 616 represented by first axis 616a, computer system 600 outputs tactile feedback 65 If. At FIG. 61, computer system 600 also detects that user input 650k includes movement across a center line of graphical representation 616 represented by second axis 616b. Based on a determination that user input 650k includes movement across the center line of graphical representation 616 represented by second axis 616b, computer system 600 outputs tactile feedback 651g, as shown at FIG. 61. In some embodiments, computer system 600 outputs tactile feedback 65 If as user input 650k moves across the center line of graphical representation 616 represented by first axis 616a. In some embodiments, computer system 600 outputs tactile feedback 651g as user input 650k moves across the center line of graphical representation 616 represented by second axis 616b.

[0272] At FIG. 6J, computer system 600 detects an end of user input 650k (e.g., computer system 600 detects a lift off of contact associated with user input 650k and / or detects an end of movement associated with user input 650k). In response to detecting the end of user input 650k, computer system 600 outputs tactile feedback 65 Ih, as shown at FIG. 6J. In addition, computer system 600 updates the location and / or position of indicator 616c relative to first axis 616a and second axis 616b based on the movement of user input 650k. For instance, at FIG. 6K, computer system 600 displays indicator 616c at a position that is to the left and below the position of indicator 616c shown at FIGS. 6H and 61. Computer system 600 updates the appearance of field of view representation 614a to include an appearance that is based on the current tone value and the current saturation value represented by indicator 616c, as shown by sixth hatching of 614a at FIG. 6 J. Further still, computer system 600updates tone value indicator 614b to indicate updated values of tone and updates saturation value indicator 614c to indicate the updated values of saturation. At FIG. 6 J, tone value indicator 614b indicates that the current value of tone has been changed from -12 to -25 and saturation value indicator 614c indicates that the current value of saturation has been changed from -12 to -25 based on user input 650k. As such, computer system 600 is configured to concurrently adjust both the values of tone and saturation in response to a single user input corresponding to graphical representation 616.

[0273] At FIG. 6J, computer system 600 detects user input 6501 corresponding to slider 617 of style editing user interface 614. In response to detecting user input 6501, computer system 600 updates a color temperature of the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c, as shown at FIG. 6K. In response to detecting user input 6501, computer system 600 outputs tactile feedback 65 li to confirm that computer system 600 received user input 6501 and / or that computer system 600 is adjusting a parameter of the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c.

[0274] At FIG. 6K, a position of indicator 617a of slider 617 has moved to the right (e.g., relative to a display orientation of display 602) based on user input 6501. In response to detecting user input 6501, computer system 600 updates an appearance of field of view representation 614a to indicate the change and / or adjustment to the color temperature, as shown by seventh hatching at FIG. 6K. In response to detecting an end of user input 6501, computer system 600 outputs tactile feedback 65 Ij to confirm that computer system 600 detected the end of user input 6501 and / or that computer system 600 adjusted the color temperature of the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c.

[0275] At FIG. 6K, adjustment of the color temperature of the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c does not change the current values of tone and saturation. In some embodiments, adjustment of the color temperature based on user input directed to slider 617 causes a corresponding change in the current values of tone and saturation that is based on the adjustment of the color temperature. In some such embodiments, computer system 600 updates display of graphical representation 616 to include indicator 616c at a position that is based on the change to the current values of tone and saturation caused by the change in color temperature. In some embodiments, computer system 600 updates an appearance (e.g., a color, a shading, a color temperature, a tone, a saturation, and / or a contrast) of graphical representation 616 based on the change in color temperature.

[0276] At FIG. 6K, computer system 600 detects user input 650m corresponding to field of view representation 614a. In response to detecting user input 650m, computer system 600 displays styles user interface 608, as shown at FIG. 6L. While user input 650m corresponds to field of view representation 614a at FIG. 6K, in some embodiments, user input 650m corresponds to a different location of style editing user interface 614 that does not include a location of graphical representation 616 and / or slider 617. In some embodiments, computer system 600 detects a user input requesting display of styles user interface 608 and / or detects a timeout condition and, in response, displays styles user interface 608, as shown in FIG. 6L.

[0277] At FIG. 6L, computer system 600 displays styles user interface 608, where field of view representation 608a includes the appearance of field of view representation 614a shown at FIG. 6K, as indicated by the seventh hatching of 608a. Thus, computer system 600 has modified the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c based on the user inputs received and / or detected described above with reference to FIGS. 6F-6K. In addition, computer system 600 displays graphical representation 612 of style user interface object 610c with an appearance that corresponds to graphical representation 616 shown at FIG. 6K. In other words, a position of indicator 612c of graphical representation 612 for style user interface object 610c is at a position relative to first axis 612a and second axis 612b that corresponds to the position of indicator 616c relative to first axis 616a and second axis 616b of graphical representation 616.

[0278] At FIG. 6L, computer system 600 detects user input 650n corresponding to style user interface object 610b. In some embodiments, in response to detecting user input 650n, computer system 600 selects style user interface object 610b, de-selects style user interface object 610c, and applies a style corresponding to style user interface object 610b to field of view representation 608a. For instance, in some embodiments, computer system 600 updates display of field of view representation 608a to include an appearance associated with the style of style user interface object 610b and in response to detecting user input 650n, such as shown in FIG. 6D. While FIG. 6L illustrates user input 650n as a tap gesture corresponding to a location of style user interface object 610b, computer system 600 is also optionally configured to select style user interface object 610b in response to user input 650o. At FIG. 6L, user input 650o corresponds to a right swipe gesture corresponding to style region 610.

[0279] At FIG. 6M, computer system 600 has detected user input requesting to display camera user interface 604 and / or to exit an editing mode. For instance, at FIG. 6M, computer system 600 displays camera user interface 604 without displaying styles user interface 608and / or style region 610. At FIG. 6M, computer system 600 displays field of view representation 604a with an appearance that corresponds to style user interface object 610c. As shown at FIG. 6M, field of view representation 604a includes the seventh hatching, indicating that images and / or videos captured by the camera of computer system 600 will be captured with the style corresponding to style user interface object 610c.

[0280] At FIG. 6M, computer system 600 detects user input 650p corresponding to input device 600a (e.g., a physical and / or mechanical button that is distinct from display 602) of computer system 600. In some embodiments, input device 600a includes a capacitive button and / or a capacitive surface that is configured to detect touch inputs, movement of touch inputs, and / or swipe inputs. In response to detecting user input 650p, computer system 600 displays settings menu 618, as shown at FIG. 6N.

[0281] At FIG. 6N, computer system 600 displays settings menu 618 overlaid on camera user interface 604. Settings menu 618 includes setting user interface objects 618a-618d. At FIG. 6N, setting user interface object 618b corresponds to the styles in which computer system 600 is configured to apply to images and / or videos. For instance, at FIG. 6N, computer system 600 detects user input 650q (e.g., a tap input and / or a touch input) corresponding to setting user interface object 618b. In response to detecting user input 650q, computer system 600 displays style menu 620, as shown at FIG. 60.

[0282] At FIG. 60, computer system 600 displays style menu 620 overlaid on camera user interface 604. Style menu 620 includes style indicators 620a-620e corresponding to respective styles for images and / or videos captured via the camera of computer system 600. At FIG. 60, style indicator 620c is currently selected and applied by computer system 600. For instance, at FIG. 60, computer system 600 displays field of view representation 604a of camera user interface 604 with the appearance corresponding to the style of style indicator 620c, as represented by seventh hatching of 604a at FIG. 60. Style menu 620 further includes style indicator 620f, which provides the user of computer system 600 with a visual indication that style menu 620 corresponds to respective styles that can be applied to images and / or videos captured via the camera of computer system 600.

[0283] At FIG. 60, computer system 600 detects user input 650r corresponding to input device 600a of computer system 600. In response to detecting user input 650r, computer system 600 adjusts the style applied to images and / or videos captured via the camera of computer system 600. For example, at FIG. 6P, computer system 600 displays camera userinterface 604 with field of view representation 604a including an appearance having eighth hatching.

[0284] At FIG. 6P, computer system 600 selects style indicator 620b instead of style indicator 620c, and therefore, displays field of view representation 604a with an appearance that is different from the appearance of field of view representation 604a shown at FIG. 60. Thus, computer system 600 is configured to adjust, modify, and / or change the style applied to images and / or videos captured via the camera of computer system 600 in response to user input detected while displaying style menu 620. In some embodiments, style menu 620 includes less than or greater than five style indicators. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays additional style indicators on style menu 620 in response to detecting user input corresponding to input device 600a and / or style menu 620.

[0285] At FIG. 6P, computer system 600 detects user input 650s (e.g., a tap input and / or a touch input) corresponding to capture user interface object 604b. In response to detecting user input 650s, computer system 600 captures an image and / or video of content that is displayed within field of view representation 604a. In addition, computer system 600 applies the style corresponding to style indicator 620b to the image and / or video captured via the camera of computer system 600 in response to detecting user input 650s. Thus, computer system 600 is configured to apply a selected style to images and / or videos that are captured via the camera of computer system 600 while computer system 600 displays camera user interface 604.

[0286] At FIG. 6P, computer system 600 detects user input 650t (e.g., a swipe input and / or a touch input) corresponding to a request to display second camera user interface 621 corresponding to an application that is different from an application of camera user interface 604. In response to detecting user input 650t, computer system 600 displays second camera user interface 621, as shown at FIG. 6Q. Computer system 600 displays second camera user interface 621 and style menu 620 displayed overlaid on second camera user interface 621, as shown at FIG. 6Q. In addition, computer system 600 displays field of view representation 621a of second camera user interface 621 with the appearance corresponding to the style of style indicator 620b. Thus, computer system 600 is configured to apply a selected style to images and / or videos that are captured via the camera of computer system 600 using different types of camera applications. In other words, computer system 600 continues to apply a selected style to images and / or videos that are captured via the camera of computer system600 regardless of which application of computer system 600 causes the camera of computer system 600 to capture the image and / or video.

[0287] At FIG. 6Q, computer system 600 detects user input 650u corresponding to input device 600a. In response to detecting user input 650u, computer system 600 displays second camera user interface 621 and displays field of view representation 621a with an appearance corresponding to a different style, as shown at FIG. 6R.

[0288] At FIG. 6R, computer system 600 displays field of view representation 621a with the appearance corresponding to the style of style indicator 620c, as represented by seventh hatching of 621a at FIG. 6Q. Therefore, computer system 600 is configured to change the style applied to images and / or videos that are captured via the camera of computer system 600 in response to detecting user input while displaying style menu 620. At FIG. 6R, computer system 600 detects user input 650v corresponding to capture user interface object 621b. In response to detecting user input 650v, computer system 600 captures an image and / or video of content that is displayed within field of view representation 621a and applies the style of style indicator 620c to the image and / or video. At FIG. 6R, computer system 600 detects user input 650w (e.g., a press input and / or a touch input) corresponding to a request to display a user interface of a different application from the application corresponding to second camera user interface 621. In response to detecting user input 650w, computer system 600 displays photos user interface 622, as shown at FIG. 6S.

[0289] At FIG. 6S, computer system displays photos user interface 622, which corresponds to a media library of computer system 600. At FIG. 6S, photos user interface 622 includes photo representation 622a, photo library region 624, and editing user interface object 622b. Photo representation 622a corresponds to a video of the media library of computer system 600. For instance, at FIG. 6S, computer system 600 displays scrubber 622c overlaid on photo representation 622a indicating that the media item corresponding to photo representation 622a is a video media item. In some embodiments, computer system 600 does not display and / or forgoes display of scrubber 622c based on a determination that the media item corresponding to photo representation 622a is not a video media item (e.g., is a photo media item and / or a screenshot media item). At FIG. 6S, photo library region 624 includes media item indicators 624a-624f corresponding to media items stored on and / or otherwise accessible to computer system 600. In some embodiments, in response to detecting user input corresponding to photo library region 624 and / or a respective media item indicator624a-624f, computer system 600 updates photo representation 622a with an image and / or video of a media item corresponding to the respective media item indicator 624a-624f.

[0290] At FIG. 6S, computer system 600 detects user input 650x corresponding to editing user interface object 622b. In response to detecting user input 650x, computer system 600 displays editing user interface 626, as shown at FIG. 6T.

[0291] At FIG. 6T, editing user interface 626 corresponds to a user interface for editing a style of the media item of photo representation 622a. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays editing user interface 626 for editing a different parameter (e.g., an editing parameter other than styles) in response to detecting user input 650x. For example, editing user interface 626 includes style user interface object 627a, live user interface object 627b, adjust user interface object 627c, and crop user interface object 627d. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays editing user interface 626 for adjusting live images settings, adjusting visual parameters, and / or cropping the media item corresponding to photo representation 622a. In some such embodiments, computer system 600 displays editing user interface 626 for editing the styles of the media item of photo representation 622a in response to detecting user input corresponding to styles user interface object 627a of editing user interface 626.

[0292] At FIG. 6T, computer system 600 displays editing user interface 626 with style indicators 626a-626d, which correspond to respective styles that can be applied to the media item of photo representation 622a by computer system 600. In some embodiments, style indicators 626a-626d correspond to the same styles as style user interface objects 610a-610d. Thus, in some embodiments, computer system 600 provides the user of computer system 600 with the same styles that have been customized and / or edited by the user via style editing user interface 614.

[0293] As set forth above, the media item corresponding to photo representation 622a shown at FIG. 6T is a video media item. At FIG. 6T, computer system 600 detects user input 650y corresponding to playback user interface object 626e of editing user interface 626. In response to detecting user input 650y, computer system 600 initiates playback of the video media item of photo representation 622a, as shown at FIG. 6U.

[0294] At FIG. 6U, computer system 600 has initiated playback of the video media item corresponding to photo representation 622a. For instance, scrubber 622c indicates that playback of the video media item has progressed by two seconds and that 18 seconds remainin the playback of the video media item (e.g., as compared to zero seconds elapsing and 20 seconds remaining shown at FIG. 6T). Computer system 600 is therefore configured to adjust, modify, and / or change the style applied to the video media item corresponding to photo representation 622a while computer system 600 plays back the video media item. For example, at FIG. 6U, computer system 600 detects user input 650z (e.g., a tap input and / or a touch input) corresponding to style indicators 626a-626d. In response to detecting user input 650z, computer system 600 applies a different style to the video media item of photo representation 622a, as shown at FIG. 6V.

[0295] At FIG. 6V, computer system 600 displays photo representation 622a of the video media item with an appearance that is different from the appearance of photo representation 622a shown at FIG. 6U. For instance, at FIG. 6V, computer system 600 displays photo representation 622a with ninth hatching, whereas computer system 600 displayed photo representation 622a with no hatching at FIG. 6U. In addition, computer system 600 has continued to play back the video media item corresponding to photo representation 622a, as indicated by scrubber 622c. Scrubber 622c indicates that four seconds of the video media item have elapsed and that 16 second remain in the playback of the video media item. In some embodiments, computer system 600 pauses playback of the video media item in response to detecting user input 650z.

[0296] At FIG. 6V, computer system 600 detects user input 650aa corresponding to scrubber 622c. In response to detecting user input 650aa, computer system 600 adjusts, changes, and / or updates a playback time of the video media item corresponding to photo representation 622a. For instance, at FIG. 6W, scrubber 622c indicates that 16 seconds of the video media item have elapsed and that four seconds remain in the playback of the video media item. Therefore, computer system 600 updated the playback time of the video media item to a time corresponding to 16 seconds in response to detecting user input 650aa. In addition, at FIG. 6W, computer system 600 displays photo representation 622a with the style corresponding to style user interface object 626c, as indicated by ninth hatching. Thus, computer system 600 can display different styles applied to the video media item at different playback times.

[0297] At FIG. 6W, computer system 600 detects user input 650ab (e.g., a swipe input and / or a touch input) corresponding to photo representation 622a. User input 650ab corresponds to a request to display a different media item of the media library. In response to detecting user input 650ab, computer system 600 displays photo representation 622dcorresponding to a second media item of the media library, as shown at FIG. 6X, where the second media item is different from the video media item corresponding to photo representation 622a.

[0298] At FIG. 6X, computer system 600 displays photos user interface 622 with photo representation 622d corresponding to the second media item that is different from the video media item corresponding to photo representation 622a. At FIG. 6X, the second media item corresponding to photo representation 622d is a photo media item and / or an image media item (e.g., not a video media item). Computer system 600 displays photo representation 622d as part of editing user interface 626 and applies the standard style to photo representation 622d. Thus, in some embodiments, computer system 600 does not apply the style applied to photo representation 622a to photo representation 622d in response to detecting user input 650ab. In some embodiments, computer system 600 does apply the style applied to photo representation 622a to photo representation 622d in response to detecting user input 650ab (e.g., in response to navigating from a first media item to a second media item of the media library while displaying editing user interface 626).

[0299] At FIG. 6X, computer system 600 detects user input 650ac (e.g., a de-pinch gesture and / or a two-finger touch gesture) corresponding to a request to change and / or modify a zoom level of photo representation 622d, while computer system 600 displays editing user interface 626. In addition, computer system 600 detects user input 650ad (e.g., a swipe input and / or a touch gesture) corresponding to a request to change the style applied to photo representation 622d. In response to detecting user input 650ac, computer system 600 zooms, enlarges, and / or magnifies photo representation 622d, as shown at FIG. 6Y. In response to detecting user input 650ad, computer system displays photo representation 622d with an appearance that corresponds to a style of style indicator 626b, as shown by tenth hatching at FIG. 6Y.

[0300] At FIG. 6Y, computer system 600 applies the style of style indicator 626b to photo representation 622d and zooms in photo representation 622d based on receiving user inputs 650ac and 650ad. Therefore, computer system 600 is configured to apply a style to photo representation 622d and / or change an appearance of photo representation 622d while photo representation 622d is magnified and / or zoomed. At FIG. 6Y, computer system 600 zooms and / or enlarges photo representation 622d within a frame. In other words, computer system 600 does not display a full screen view of photo representation 622d in response to detecting user input 650ac. Computer system 600 zooms photo representation 622d withinthe frame, as shown at FIG. 6Y, while computer system 600 displays photo representation 622d on editing user interface 626. As set forth below with reference to FIGS. 8A-8Z, computer system 600 is optionally configured to zoom photo representation 622d so that computer system 600 displays the zoomed in version of photo representation 622d as full screen while computer system 600 does not display editing user interface 626 (e.g., while computer system 600 displays photos user interface 622).

[0301] In some embodiments, computer system 600 is configured to enable a user to select a style for capturing an image and / or video via the camera of computer system 600 as part of a set up and / or configuration process of computer system 600. For instance, at FIG. 6Z, computer system 600 displays first configuration user interface 630. First configuration user interface 630 allows a user of computer system 600 to select, set, and / or customize a style to be applied to videos and / or images captured via the camera of computer system 600. First configuration user interface 630 includes information region 630a indicating that first configuration user interface 630 allows a user to customize a style applied to images and / or videos captured via the camera of computer system 600. First configuration user interface 630 also includes customization user interface object 630b and dismiss user interface object 630c.

[0302] At FIG. 6Z, computer system 600 detects user input 650ae (e.g., a tap input and / or a touch input) corresponding to dismiss user interface object 630c. In some embodiments, in response to detecting user input 650ae, computer system 600 ceases to display first configuration user interface 630 without setting and / or configuring a style to be applied to images and / or videos captured via the camera of computer system 600. For instance, in some embodiments, computer system 600 replaces display of first configuration user interface 630 with a different user interface (e.g., camera user interface 604 and / or photos user interface 622) in response to detecting user input 650ae.

[0303] In some embodiments, at FIG. 6Z, computer system 600 detects user input 650af corresponding to customization user interface object 630b. In response to detecting user input 650af, computer system 600 displays style user interface 632, as shown at FIG. 6AA.

[0304] At FIG. 6AA, style user interface 632 is similar to styles user interface 608 and / or editing user interface 626. For instance, style user interface 632 includes style indicators 632a-632d corresponding to different styles that computer system 600 can apply to images and / or videos captured via the camera of computer system 600. At FIG. 6AA, computersystem 600 displays photo representation 632f corresponding to a respective image and / or video for which computer system 600 can apply a selected style. As set forth below, in some embodiments, the media item corresponding to photo representation 632f is a stock and / or system-defined photo that enables a user to view how the different styles look when applied to an image. For instance, in some embodiments, computer system 600 displays style user interface 632 before computer system 600 has captured any images and / or videos via the camera of computer system 600. In some embodiments, computer system 600 can apply styles to media items of a first type, but not media items of a second type. Thus, computer system 600 can provide, suggest, and / or otherwise display different images for a user to preview while selecting a respective style to apply to images and / or videos captured via the camera of computer system 600.

[0305] At FIG. 6AA, computer system 600 detects user input 650ag corresponding style indicators 632a-632e. In response to detecting user input 650ag, computer system 600 updates the style applied to photo representation 632f, as shown by eleventh hatching of photo representation 632f at FIG. 6AB.

[0306] At FIG. 6AB, computer system 600 has applied the updated style to photo representation 632f and updates display of photo representation 632f to include an appearance that is based on the selected style. For instance, at FIG. 6AB, computer system 600 has selected style indicator 632b instead of style indicator 632a (e.g., the style indicator selected at FIG. 6AA) and displays photo representation 632f with an appearance that is based on the style of style indicator 632b. At FIG. 6AB, computer system 600 detects user input 650ah corresponding to a request to display a different media item. In response to detecting user input 650ah, computer system 600 displays photo representation 632g corresponding to a media item that is different from the media item of photo representation 632f, as shown at FIG. 6 AC.

[0307] At FIG. 6AC, the media item corresponding to photo representation 632g is different from the media item corresponding to photo representation 632f, shown at FIGS. 6AA and 6 AB. In some embodiments, computer system 600 includes stock and / or stored media items so that the user of computer system 600 can view how different styles appear on various different media items. For instance, as set forth above, in some embodiments, computer system displays style user interface 632 before computer system 600 has captured, stored, and / or otherwise received images and / or videos that are specific to the user setting up the device. In some embodiments, computer system 600 is configured to apply styles tomedia items of a first type, but not media items of a second type. As such, computer system 600 includes various media items that a user can transition to and / or navigate through to view how different styles appear on different media items before selecting a style for applying to images and / or videos captured via the camera of computer system.

[0308] At FIG. 6AC, photo representation 632g includes the same style that was applied to photo representation 632f, shown at FIG. 6AB. For instance, at FIG. 6AC, computer system displays photo representation 632g with the eleventh hatching to indicate that the style of style indicator 632b is being applied to photo representation 632g. As such, computer system 600 can transition to and / or navigate between different media items while applying a respective style so that the user of computer system 600 can view how the style appears on different media items.

[0309] At FIG. 6AC, computer system 600 detects user input 650ai (e.g., a swipe input and / or a touch input) corresponding to a request to change the media item back to the media item of photo representation 632f. In response to detecting user input 650ai, computer system 600 displays style user interface 632 with photo representation 632f, as shown at FIG. 6AD.

[0310] At FIG. 6AD, computer system 600 displays photo representation 632f with an appearance based on the selected style (e.g., the style of style indicator 632b). As set forth above, computer system 600 is configured to apply the selected style to different media items so that a user can determine whether to select the respective style.

[0311] At FIG. 6AD, computer system 600 detects user input 650aj (e.g., a tap input and / or a touch input) corresponding to confirm user interface object 632h of style user interface 632. In response to detecting user input 650aj, computer system 600 displays customization user interface 634, as shown at FIG. 6AE.

[0312] At FIG. 6AE, customization user interface 634 includes style indicator 632b without displaying style indicators 632a and 632c-632e. In addition, computer system 600 displays style indicator 632b at a size that is larger than the size of style indicator 632b displayed at style user interface 632. Style indicator 632b includes graphical representation 636 having first axis 636a, second axis 636b, and indicator 636c. As set forth above, indicator 636c of graphical representation 636 indicates a current value of tone based on a position and / or location of indicator 636c relative to first axis 636a and / or indicates a current value of saturation based on a position and / or location of indicator 636c relative to secondaxis 636b. Computer system 600 also displays slider 636d on customization user interface 634 to indicate that the user of computer system 600 can customize and / or otherwise modify the style of style indicator 632b.

[0313] At FIG. 6AE, computer system 600 detects user input 650ak corresponding to graphical representation 636 and / or style indicator 632b. In response to detecting user input 650ak, computer system 600 displays editing user interface 638, as shown at FIG. 6AF.

[0314] At FIG. 6AF, editing user interface 638 includes graphical representation 636 and slider 636d, so that the user of computer system 600 can customize the style based on their preferences. Editing user interface 638 is similar to style editing user interface 614 described above with reference to FIGS. 6F-6K. For instance, in response to detecting user input corresponding to graphical representation 636 and / or slider 636d, computer system 600 is configured to adjust, modify, and / or change one or more parameters of the style of style indicator 632b. In some embodiments, in response to detecting user input corresponding to a request to change a position of indicator 636c relative to first axis 636a, computer system 600 adjusts and / or modifies a current value of tone for the style of style indicator 632b. In some embodiments, in response to detecting user input corresponding to a request to change a position of indicator 636c relative to second axis 636b, computer system 600 adjusts and / or modifies a current value of saturation for the style of style indicator 632b. In some embodiments, in response to detecting user input corresponding to a request to change a position indicator 636c relative to both first axis 636a and second axis 636b, computer system 600 adjusts and / or modifies a current value of both tone and saturation for the style of style indicator 632b. In some embodiments, in response to user input corresponding to slider 636d, computer system 600 adjusts and / or modifies a color temperature of the style of style indicator 632b (and, optionally, adjusts and / or modifies the current values of tone and / or saturation based on the change in color temperature).

[0315] At FIG. 6AF, computer system 600 detects user input 650al (e.g., a tap input, a swipe input, and / or a touch input) corresponding to graphical representation 636. In response to detecting user input 650al, computer system 600 adjusts and / or modifies a current value of tone, a current value of saturation, and / or a position of indicator 636c based on a location and / or movement associated with user input 650al. At FIG. 6AF, computer system 600 detects user input 650am (e.g., a tap input and / or a touch input) corresponding to photo representation 632f. In response to detecting user input 650am, computer system 600 displays confirmation user interface 640, as shown at FIG. 6AG.

[0316] At FIG. 6AG, computer system 600 displays photo representation 632f on confirmation user interface 640, where photo representation 632f includes an appearance based on the selected style. In other words, photo representation 632f is displayed with a style (e.g., a default style) that computer system 600 is configured to apply to images and / or videos captured via the camera of computer system 600. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays one or more additional user interfaces that allow the user of computer system 600 to select and / or set different styles for image media items and video media items. In some embodiments, computer system 600 provides additional options for a user to apply different styles to images captured via the camera of computer system 600 and videos captured via the camera of computer system 600.

[0317] At FIG. 6AG, computer system 600 detects user input 650an (e.g., a tap input and / or a touch input) corresponding to done user interface object 640a of confirmation user interface 640. In response to detecting user input 650an, computer system 600 sets the selected style as the style (e.g., a default style) to be applied to images and / or videos captured via the camera of computer system 600.

[0318] FIGS. 7A-7B are flow diagrams illustrating a method for managing photographic styles using a computer system in accordance with some embodiments. Method 700 is performed at a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, and / or 600) (e.g., a smart phone, a smart watch, a tablet computer, a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a wearable device, and / or head-mounted device) that is in communication with (e.g., includes and / or is connected to) one or more display generation components (e.g., 602) (e.g., one or more displays, touchscreen displays, monitors, holographic display systems, and / or head-mounted display systems) and one or more input devices (e.g., 600a and / or 602) (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-sensitive display); a mouse; a keyboard; a remote control; a visual input device (e.g., one or more cameras such as, e.g., an infrared camera, a depth camera, a visible light camera, and / or a gaze tracking camera); an audio input device (e.g., a microphone); a biometric sensor (e.g., a fingerprint sensor, a face identification sensor, a gaze tracking sensor, and / or an iris identification sensor); and / or one or more mechanical input devices (e.g., a depressible input mechanism; a button; a rotatable input mechanism; a crown; and / or a dial)). Some operations in method 700 are, optionally, combined, the orders of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted.

[0319] As described below, method 700 provides an intuitive way for managing photographic styles. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user for managingphotographic styles, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery- operated computing devices, enabling a user to manage photographic styles faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[0320] Computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, and / or 600) displays (702), via the one or more display generation components (e.g., 602), a media editing user interface (e.g., 608, 614, 622, 626, 632, 634, and / or 638) (e.g., a user interface that includes display of one or more media items, one or more control user interface objects for editing, adjusting, modifying, and / or changing one or more visual aspects of a respective media item, and / or one or more user interface objects for adding, removing, repositioning, sharing, bookmarking, deleting, and / or providing a designation to the one or more media items), wherein the media editing user interface (e.g., 608, 614, 622, 626, 632, 634, and / or 638) includes a media editing control user interface object (e.g., 610a-610e, 616, 626a-626e, 632a-632e, and / or 636) (e.g., a button, an affordance, a graphical user interface element, a user selectable icon, and / or a region of the media editing control user interface that is configured to adjust one or more visual parameters and / or visual aspects of one or more media items).

[0321] The media editing control user interface object (e.g., 610a-610e, 616, 626a-626e, 632a-632e, and / or 636) includes (704) a two-dimensional region (e.g., 612, 616, and / or 636) (e.g., a region of the media editing user interface, such as a visibly distinct region of the media editing user interface that is separate from one or more media items of the media editing user interface, that includes a first axis and a second axis that are perpendicular to one another to form a two-dimensional shape, such as a square, a rectangle, a rhombus, a diamond, a circle, and / or a two-dimensional polygon) that is configured to concurrently (e.g., at the same time and / or separately) adjust a current value (e.g., as indicated by 614b and / or 614c) of a first parameter of a media item (e.g., 604a, 608a, 614a, 621a, 622a, 622d, 632f, 632g, 804a, 814a, 816a, 818a, 822a, 840a, and / or 844a) (e.g., tone, saturation, color temperature, brightness, opaqueness, and / or contrast) and a current value (e.g., as indicated by 614b and / or 614c) of a second parameter of the media item (e.g., 604a, 608a, 614a, 621a, 622a, 622d, 632f, 632g, 804a, 814a, 816a, 818a, 822a, 840a, and / or 844a) (e.g., tone, saturation, color temperature, brightness, opaqueness, and / or contrast) (in some embodiments, the first parameter and the second parameter are different from one another).

[0322] The current value (e.g., as indicated by 614b and / or 614c) of the first parameter of the media item (e.g., 604a, 608a, 614a, 621a, 622a, 622d, 632f, 632g, 804a, 814a, 816a, 818a, 822a, 840a, and / or 844a) is adjusted (706) (e.g., changed, modified, and / or altered) based onuser input (e.g., 650g, 650h, 650i, 650j, 650k, and / or 650ak) (e.g., a tap gesture, a swipe gesture, an air gesture, a touch input, a voice command, and / or a button press) that includes a change in position of a parameter index point (e.g., 612a, 616a, and / or 636a) (e.g., based on movement of the input such as movement of a current value indicator that indicates a location of the parameter index point from a first location to a second location, or an input selecting a location that is different from a current location of the current value, such as a location that is different from a current value indicator that indicates a location of the parameter index point) relative to a first axis (e.g., 612a, 612b, 616a, 616b, 636a, and / or 636b) (e.g., a first onedimensional axis extending in a first direction) of the two-dimensional region (e.g., 612, 616, and / or 636). In some e...

Claims

AMENDED CLAIMS received by the International Bureau on 29 September 2025 (29.09.2025)What is claimed is:

1. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes concurrently displaying a media item at a first location with a media editing control user interface object, and wherein: the media editing control user interface object includes a two- dimensional region that is displayed at a second location that is different from the first location; the two-dimensional region is configured to concurrently adjust a current value of a first parameter of the media item and a current value of a second parameter of the media item; the current value of the first parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of a parameter index point relative to a first axis of the two-dimensional region; and the current value of the second parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to a second axis of the two-dimensional region that is perpendicular to the first axis of the two- dimensional region; while displaying the media editing user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the first parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis; andin accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the second parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis.

2. The method of claim 1, further comprising: in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to both the first axis of the media editing control user interface object and the second axis of the media editing control user interface object: adjusting the first parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis; and adjusting the second parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis.

3. The method of any of claims 1-2, further comprising: displaying, via the one or more display generation components and as part of the media editing user interface, a selectable control user interface object that is configured to adjust a current value of a third parameter of the media item, wherein the selectable control user interface object is visually distinct from the media editing control user interface object, and wherein the third parameter is different from the first parameter and the second parameter.

4. The method of claim 3, further comprising: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to the selectable control user interface object; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the selectable control user interface object: adjusting the current value of the third parameter of the media item; and adjusting an appearance of the two-dimensional region of the media editing control user interface object.

5. The method of any of claims 3-4, further comprising: in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object: adjusting values of one or more parameters of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point without adjusting the current value of the third parameter of the media item; and adjusting values of one or more parameters of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point without adjusting an appearance of the selectable control user interface object.

6. The method of any of claims 3-5, further comprising: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to the selectable control user interface object; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the selectable control user interface object, outputting tactile feedback corresponding to the input directed to the selectable control user interface object.

7. The method of any of claims 1-6, wherein the first parameter and the second parameter are selected from the group consisting of: tone, saturation, and color temperature.

8. (Cancelled).

9. The method of claim 1, further comprising: in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object: adjusting an appearance of the media item based on the change in position of the parameter index point.

10. The method of any of claims 1-7 and 9, further comprising: in response to detecting user input the two-dimensional region of the media editing control user interface object, outputting tactile feedback corresponding to an input directed to the two-dimensional region.

11. The method of any of claims 1-7 and 9-10, further comprising: in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the two-dimensional region of the media editing control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the user input corresponds to a change in position of the parameter index point across a respective portion of the two-dimensional region of the media editing control user interface object, outputting tactile feedback corresponding to an input directed to the two-dimensional region of the media editing control user interface object.

12. The method of any of claims 1-7 and 9-11, further comprising: in response to detecting an end of the user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object, outputting tactile feedback corresponding to an end of input being directed to the media editing control user interface object.

13. The method of any of claims 1-7 and 9-12, further comprising: prior to detecting the user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a graphical indication of a current value of the first parameter and a current value of the second parameter.

14. The method of claim 13, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a camera shutter user interface object.

15. The method of claim 13, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a close user interface object, the method further comprising: while displaying the close user interface object, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to selection of the close user interface object; and in response to detecting the input corresponding to selection of the close user interface object, ceasing display of the media editing user interface.

16. The method of claim 13, further comprising: while displaying the graphical indication of the current value of the first parameter and the current value of the second parameter, wherein the media editing control user interface object is in a disabled state while displaying the graphical indication of the current value of the first parameter and the current value of the second parameter, detecting, user input corresponding to the graphical indication; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the graphical indication, transitioning the media editing control user interface object from the disabled state to an active state, wherein the media editing control user interface object is not configured to concurrently adjust the current value of the first parameter and the current value of the second parameter while in the disabled state.

17. The method of claim 16, further comprising: while the media editing control user interface object is in the disabled state, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a camera shutter object; and while the media editing control user interface object is in the active state, forgoing display of the camera shutter object.

18. The method of any of claims 13-17, further comprising: while displaying the graphical indication of the current value of the first parameter and the current value of the second parameter, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to the media editing user interface; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the media editing user interface, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a second graphical indication of an updated parameter value of the first parameter and an updated parameter value of the second parameter, wherein the updated parameter value of the first parameter is different from the current value of the first parameter and the updated parameter value of the second parameter is different from the current value of the second parameter.

19. The method of any of claims 1-7 and 9-18, further comprising: while displaying the media editing control user interface object, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input that is directed to a portion of a user interface that is outside of the media editing control user interface object; andin response to detecting the user input that is directed to a portion of a user interface that is outside of the media editing control user interface object: collapsing display of the media editing control user interface object; and transitioning display of the media editing control user interface object into a graphical indication of an adjusted parameter value of the first parameter and an adjusted parameter value of the second parameter, wherein the adjusted parameter value of the first parameter was set while displaying the media editing control user interface object, and wherein the adjusted parameter value of the second parameter was set while displaying the media editing control user interface object.

20. The method of any of claims 1-7 and 9-19, further comprising: after detecting the user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object, adjusting an appearance of the media item based on an adjustment of a respective parameter of the media item, wherein the media item is an existing media item of a media library.

21. The method of any of claims 1-7 and 9-20, further comprising: after detecting the user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to capture the media item using a first application; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the request to capture the media item using the first application: capturing the media item using an effect that is based on the current value of the first parameter and the current value of the second parameter.

22. The method of claim 21, wherein: in accordance with a determination that the media item is of a first type, the effect is a first effect; and in accordance with a determination that the media item is of a second type, the effect is a second effect that is different from the first effect.

23. The method of any of claims 21-22, further comprising: after detecting the user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request tocapture the media item using a second application that is different from the first application; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the request to capture the media item using the second application: capturing the media item using an effect that is based on the current value of the first parameter and the current value of the second parameter.

24. The method of any of claims 1-7 and 9-23, wherein the media item is a video media item, the method further comprising: in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object while playing back the video media item, adjusting a respective parameter of the video media item.

25. The method of any of claims 1-7 and 9-24, wherein the media item is a video media item, the method further comprising: while displaying media editing control user interface object, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a user input corresponding to a request to adjust a playback position of the video media item; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the request to adjust the playback position of the video media item, adjusting the playback position of the video media item while maintaining display of the media editing control user interface object.

26. The method of any of claims 1-7 and 9-25, further comprising: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a plurality of parameter configurations for the media item, wherein the plurality of parameter configurations includes different pairs of parameter values for the first parameter and corresponding parameter values for the second parameter.

27. The method of claim 26, wherein displaying the plurality of parameter configurations for the media item includes: displaying, via the one or more display generation components: a first parameter configuration of the plurality of parameter configurations at a first size, wherein the first parameter configuration corresponds to a currently selected parameter configuration of the plurality of parameter configurations; anda selectable control user interface object corresponding to the first parameter configuration.

28. The method of any of claims 26-27, wherein displaying the plurality of parameter configurations for the media item includes: displaying, via the one or more display generation components: a currently selected parameter configuration of the plurality of parameter configurations at a first size; and one or more non-selected parameter configurations of the plurality of parameter configurations at a second size that is smaller than the first size.

29. The method of any of claims 1-7 and 9-28, further comprising: while displaying the media editing user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input requesting to zoom the media item; and in response to detecting the user input requesting to zoom the media item: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a zoomed in portion of the media item; and displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a border around the zoomed in portion of the media item.

30. The method of any of claims 1-7 and 9-29, wherein: the media editing user interface includes: an effect user interface object, a live effect editing user interface object, an adjustment user interface object, and a crop user interface object.

31. The method of any of claims 1-7 and 9-30, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, an indication of the current value of the first parameter; and displaying, via the one or more display generation components, an indication of the current value of the second parameter.

32. The method of any of claims 1-7 and 9-31, further comprising: prior to displaying the media editing user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a sequence of one or more user inputs, wherein the sequence of one or more user inputs includes a first user input corresponding to a hardware input device of the one or more input devices; and in response to detecting the sequence of one or more user inputs, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the media editing control user interface object.

33. The method of any of claims 1-7 and 9-32, further comprising: while displaying the media editing user interface, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a tutorial animation, wherein displaying the tutorial animation includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components: a first animation of an adjustment to a respective parameter of the media item; and a second animation of an adjustment to an appearance of the media item based on the adjustment to the respective parameter of the media item.

34. The method of any of claims 1-7 and 9-33, further comprising: while displaying the media editing user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to display a second media item that is different from the media item; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the request to display the second media item that is different from the first media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the second media item, wherein an appearance of the second media item is based on the current value of the first parameter and the current value of the second parameter.

35. The method of claim 34, wherein the request to display the second media item that is different from the first media item includes user input corresponding to selection of a respective media item of a plurality of media items displayed on the media editing user interface.

36. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is incommunication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 1-7 and 9-35.

37. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 1-7 and 9-35.

38. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 1-7 and 9-35.

39. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 1-7 and 9-35.

40. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes concurrently displaying a media item at a first location with a media editing control user interface object, and wherein: the media editing control user interface object includes a two-dimensional region that is displayed at a second location that is different from the first location; the two-dimensional region is configured to concurrently adjust a current value of a first parameter of the media item and a current value of a second parameter of the media item;the current value of the first parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of a parameter index point relative to a first axis of the two-dimensional region; and the current value of the second parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to a second axis of the two-dimensional region that is perpendicular to the first axis of the two- dimensional region; while displaying the media editing user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the first parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis; and in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the second parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis.

41. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes concurrently displaying a media item at a first location with a media editing control user interface object, and wherein: the media editing control user interface object includes a two- dimensional region that is displayed at a second location that is different from the first location;the two-dimensional region is configured to concurrently adjust a current value of a first parameter of the media item and a current value of a second parameter of the media item; the current value of the first parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of a parameter index point relative to a first axis of the two-dimensional region; and the current value of the second parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to a second axis of the two-dimensional region that is perpendicular to the first axis of the two- dimensional region; while displaying the media editing user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the first parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis; and in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the second parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis.

42. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising: means for displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes concurrently displaying a media item at a first location with a media editing control user interface object, and wherein: the media editing control user interface object includes a two-dimensional region that is displayed at a second location that is different from the first location;the two-dimensional region is configured to concurrently adjust a current value of a first parameter of the media item and a current value of a second parameter of the media item; the current value of the first parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of a parameter index point relative to a first axis of the two-dimensional region; and the current value of the second parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to a second axis of the two-dimensional region that is perpendicular to the first axis of the two- dimensional region; means for, while displaying the media editing user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object; and means for, in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the first parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis; and in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the second parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis.

43. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes concurrently displaying a media item at a first location with a media editing control user interface object, and wherein: the media editing control user interface object includes a two-dimensional region that is displayed at a second location that is different from the first location;the two-dimensional region is configured to concurrently adjust a current value of a first parameter of the media item and a current value of a second parameter of the media item; the current value of the first parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of a parameter index point relative to a first axis of the two-dimensional region; and the current value of the second parameter of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to a second axis of the two-dimensional region that is perpendicular to the first axis of the two- dimensional region; while displaying the media editing user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the media editing control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the first parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the first axis; and in accordance with a determination that the user input includes a change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis of the media editing control user interface object, adjusting the second parameter of the media item based on a magnitude of the change in position of the parameter index point relative to the second axis.

44. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first media item in a media library at a first position of a media user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to display a next media item in the media library; in response to detecting the request to display the next media item in the media library: ceasing display of the first media item at the first position of the media user interface; andconcurrently displaying, via the one or more display generation components: a second media item at the first position of the media user interface, wherein the second media item is a video media item; and one or more playback parameter controls, wherein the one or more playback parameter controls include a first control that controls a first playback parameter that has multiple states; while displaying the second media item at the first position of the media user interface, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs that includes selection of the first control and selection of a respective state associated with the first control; in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs, selecting the respective state associated with the first control; and while the respective state associated with the first control is selected for the first playback parameter, playing the second media item, including: in accordance with a determination that a first state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of a type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the first state of the first playback parameter; and in accordance with a determination that a second state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of the type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the second state of the first playback parameter.

45. The method of claim 44, wherein the first playback parameter includes three or more states.

46. The method of any of claims 44-45, wherein displaying the one or more playback parameter controls includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components and concurrently with the first control that controls the first playback parameter that has multiple states, a second control, different from the first control, that controls a second playback parameter that is different from the first playback parameter.

47. The method of any of claims 44-46, further comprising:while concurrently displaying the second media item at the first position of the media user interface and the one or more playback parameter controls, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input directed to the second media item; and in response to detecting the user input directed to the second media item, ceasing display of the one or more playback parameter controls while continuing to display the second media item.

48. The method of claim 47, further comprising: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the second media item without displaying the one or more playback parameter controls, detecting, via the one or more input devices, second user input directed to the second media item; and in response to detecting the second user input directed to the second media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the one or more playback parameter controls.

49. The method of any of claims 47-48, further comprising: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the second media item without displaying the one or more playback parameter controls, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to display a third media item in the media library; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to a request to display the third media item in the media item library, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the third media item at the first position of the media user interface without displaying the one or more playback parameter controls.

50. The method of any of claims 44-49, wherein: the first playback parameter includes a playback speed of the video media item, and the sequence of one or more inputs that includes selection of the first control and selection of a respective state associated with the first control includes selection of a respective playback speed for the second media item.

51. The method of any of claims 44-50, wherein: the first playback parameter includes an audio mixing parameter, andthe sequence of one or more inputs that includes selection of the first control and selection of a respective state associated with the first control includes selection of a respective audio mix parameter for the second media item.

52. The method of claim 51, wherein the one or more playback parameter controls include an adjustable control configured to adjust a magnitude of the respective audio mix parameter for the second media item.

53. The method of any of claims 44-52, wherein the sequence of one or more inputs includes a first input selecting the first control and a second input selecting the respective state associated with the first control, the method further comprising: in response to detecting the first input selecting the first control, displaying, via the one or more display generation components: a first selectable user interface object corresponding to a first state associated with the first control; and a second selectable user interface object corresponding to a second state associated with the first control; and in response to detecting the second input selecting the respective state associated with the first control, wherein the second input corresponds to selection of a respective selectable user interface object, selecting the respective state associated with the first control.

54. The method of any of claims 44-53, further comprising: while concurrently displaying the one or more playback parameter controls and the second media item at the first position of the media user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input requesting to display a respective media item in the media library; and in response to detecting the user input requesting to display the respective media item in the media library: displaying, via the one or more generation components, the respective media item at the first position of the media user interface; in accordance with a determination that a first set of video criteria is satisfied, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a third control of the one or more playback parameter controls that controls a third playback parameter; andin accordance with a determination that the first set of video criteria is not satisfied, forgoing display of the third control of the one or more playback parameter controls that controls the third playback parameter.

55. The method of any of claims 44-53, further comprising: while concurrently displaying the one or more playback parameter controls and the second media item at the first position of the media user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input requesting to display a respective media item in the media library; and in response to detecting the user input requesting to display the respective media item in the media library: in accordance with a determination that a second set of video criteria is satisfied, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a fourth control of the one or more playback parameter controls that controls a fourth playback parameter; and in accordance with a determination that the second set of video criteria is not satisfied, forgoing display of the fourth control of the one or more playback parameter controls that controls the fourth playback parameter.

56. The method of any of claims 54-55, wherein: the first set of video criteria includes a first criterion that is met when the respective media item is a video media item that includes a frame rate above a threshold frame rate, and the third control of the one or more playback parameter controls includes a playback speed control.

57. The method of any of claims 54-56, wherein: the second set of video criteria includes a second criterion that is met when the respective media item is a video media item that includes audio mixing information, and the fourth control of the one or more playback parameter controls includes an audio mixing control.

58. The method of any of claims 44-57, further comprising: while displaying a respective media item at the first position of the media user interface at a first zoom level, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input requesting to adjust a zoom level of the respective media item; andin response to detecting the user input requesting to adjust the zoom level of the respective media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the respective media item at a second zoom level that is different from the first zoom level, and wherein the second zoom level is independent of a magnitude of the user input requesting to adjust the zoom level of the respective media item.

59. The method of any of claims 44-58, further comprising: while displaying a respective media item at the first position of the media user interface at a respective zoom level, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input directed to the respective media item displayed at the respective zoom level; and in response to detecting the user input directed to the respective media item displayed at the respective zoom level: in accordance with a determination that the respective zoom level is a first zoom level, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first set of one or more controls; and in accordance with a determination that the respective zoom level is a second zoom level that is different from the first zoom level, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a second set of one or more controls that is different from the first set of one or more controls.

60. The method of claim 59, wherein: the first set of one or more controls includes a portrait effect control, and the second set of one or more controls does not include the portrait effect control.

61. The method of any of claims 59-60, wherein: the first set of one or more controls includes a video scrubber user interface object, and the second set of one or more controls does not include the video scrubber user interface object.

62. The method of any of claims 59-61, wherein: the first set of one or more controls includes a media item scrubber user interface object, andthe second set of one or more controls does not include the media item scrubber user interface object.

63. The method of any of claims 44-62, wherein: the request to display the next media item in the media library is detected while the first media item is displayed at a first zoom level, and displaying the second media item at the first position of the media user interface includes displaying the second media item at a second zoom level that is based on the first zoom level.

64. The method of claim 63, wherein displaying the second media item at the second zoom level includes: in accordance with a determination that a first set of criteria is met and that a first portion of the second media is more relevant than a second portion of the second media item, displaying the second media item zoomed into the first portion of the second media item; and in accordance with a determination that the first set of criteria is met and that the second portion of the second media item is more relevant than the first portion of the second media item, displaying the second media item zoomed into the second portion of the second media item.

65. The method of any of claims 44-64, the method further comprising: while displaying a respective media item at the first position of the media user interface, detecting user input corresponding to a respective side of the respective media item; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the respective side of the respective media item: in accordance with a determination that a set of navigation criteria is met and that the user input corresponds to a first side of the respective media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a subsequent media item at the first position of the media user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the set of navigation criteria is met and that the user input corresponds to a second side of the respective media item that is different from the first side of the respective media item, displaying, via the one or moredisplay generation components, a previous media item at the first position of the media user interface, wherein the previous media item is different from the subsequent media item.

66. The method of claim 65, wherein the set of navigation criteria includes a zoom criterion that is met when a current zoom level of the respective media item is above a threshold zoom level.

67. The method of any of claims 44-66, further comprising: while displaying the first media item in the media library at the first position of the media user interface, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, one or more user interface objects overlaid on the first media item; and wherein an appearance of the one or more user interface objects is based on an appearance of the first media item.

68. The method of claim 67, further comprising: while displaying the one or more user interface objects overlaid on the first media item and in response to detecting a change in the appearance of the first media item, adjusting a color of the one or more user interface objects based on the change in the appearance of the first media item.

69. The method of claim 68, wherein the change in the appearance of the first media item is based a zoom and / or a pan of the first media item.

70. The method of any of claims 68-69, wherein the change in the appearance of the first media item is based on playback of the first media item or navigation through the first media item.

71. The method of any of claims 67-70, wherein: a first user interface object of the one or more user interface objects includes a first appearance that is based on a first color of a first portion, on which the first user interface object is overlaid, of the first media item, a second user interface object of the one or more user interface objects includes a second appearance that is based on a second color of a second portion, on which the second user interface object is overlaid, of the first media item, andthe first appearance of the first user interface object is different from the second appearance of the second user interface object based on the first color and the second color.

72. The method of any of claims 44-71, further comprising: while displaying a respective media item at the first position of the media user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to display a respective media item; and in response to detecting the request to display the respective media item: in accordance with a determination that the respective media item is a screenshot media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the respective media item at a first level of inset; and in accordance with a determination that the respective media item is not a screenshot media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the respective media item at a second level of inset that is different from the first level of inset.

73. The method of any of claims 44-72, wherein the one or more playback parameter controls includes an embedded video playback control.

74. The method of any of claims 44-73, further comprising: while playing back the second media item: in accordance with a determination that a playback speed of the second media item is below a threshold playback speed, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, one or more slow motion controls; and in accordance with a determination that the playback speed of the second media item is not below the threshold playback speed, forgoing display of the one or more slow motion controls.

75. The method of claim 74, wherein the one or more slow motion controls includes a first slow motion control, the method further comprising: while displaying the one or more slow motion controls, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to selection of the first slow motion control; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to selection of the first slow motion control, adjusting slow motion playback of the second media item.

76. The method of any of claims 74-75, wherein the one or more slow motion controls includes a playback speed control, the method further comprising: while displaying the one or more slow motion controls, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to the playback speed control; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to selection of the playback speed control, adjusting a playback speed of the second media item.

77. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 44-76.

78. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 44-76.

79. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 44-76.

80. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 44-76.

81. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for:while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first media item in a media library at a first position of a media user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to display a next media item in the media library; in response to detecting the request to display the next media item in the media library: ceasing display of the first media item at the first position of the media user interface; and concurrently displaying, via the one or more display generation components: a second media item at the first position of the media user interface, wherein the second media item is a video media item; and one or more playback parameter controls, wherein the one or more playback parameter controls include a first control that controls a first playback parameter that has multiple states; while displaying the second media item at the first position of the media user interface, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs that includes selection of the first control and selection of a respective state associated with the first control; in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs, selecting the respective state associated with the first control; and while the respective state associated with the first control is selected for the first playback parameter, playing the second media item, including: in accordance with a determination that a first state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of a type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the first state of the first playback parameter; and in accordance with a determination that a second state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of the type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the second state of the first playback parameter.

82. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first media item in a media library at a first position of a media user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to display a next media item in the media library; in response to detecting the request to display the next media item in the media library: ceasing display of the first media item at the first position of the media user interface; and concurrently displaying, via the one or more display generation components: a second media item at the first position of the media user interface, wherein the second media item is a video media item; and one or more playback parameter controls, wherein the one or more playback parameter controls include a first control that controls a first playback parameter that has multiple states; while displaying the second media item at the first position of the media user interface, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs that includes selection of the first control and selection of a respective state associated with the first control; in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs, selecting the respective state associated with the first control; and while the respective state associated with the first control is selected for the first playback parameter, playing the second media item, including: in accordance with a determination that a first state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of a type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the first state of the first playback parameter; and in accordance with a determination that a second state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of the type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the second state of the first playback parameter.

83. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising:means for, while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first media item in a media library at a first position of a media user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to display a next media item in the media library; means for, in response to detecting the request to display the next media item in the media library: ceasing display of the first media item at the first position of the media user interface; and concurrently displaying, via the one or more display generation components: a second media item at the first position of the media user interface, wherein the second media item is a video media item; and one or more playback parameter controls, wherein the one or more playback parameter controls include a first control that controls a first playback parameter that has multiple states; means for, while displaying the second media item at the first position of the media user interface, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs that includes selection of the first control and selection of a respective state associated with the first control; means for, in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs, selecting the respective state associated with the first control; and means for, while the respective state associated with the first control is selected for the first playback parameter, playing the second media item, including: in accordance with a determination that a first state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of a type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the first state of the first playback parameter; and in accordance with a determination that a second state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of the type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the second state of the first playback parameter.

84. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for:while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first media item in a media library at a first position of a media user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to display a next media item in the media library; in response to detecting the request to display the next media item in the media library: ceasing display of the first media item at the first position of the media user interface; and concurrently displaying, via the one or more display generation components: a second media item at the first position of the media user interface, wherein the second media item is a video media item; and one or more playback parameter controls, wherein the one or more playback parameter controls include a first control that controls a first playback parameter that has multiple states; while displaying the second media item at the first position of the media user interface, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs that includes selection of the first control and selection of a respective state associated with the first control; in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs, selecting the respective state associated with the first control; and while the respective state associated with the first control is selected for the first playback parameter, playing the second media item, including: in accordance with a determination that a first state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of a type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the first state of the first playback parameter; and in accordance with a determination that a second state is selected for the first playback parameter, playing back the second media item including outputting content of the type that is adjusted by the first playback parameter in accordance with the second state of the first playback parameter.

85. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices: subsequent to a first media item having been edited using a set of edits, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to modify a set of one or more mediaitems based on a respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item, wherein: the respective subset of one or more edits includes one or more edits from the set of edits that were made to the first media item; and the set of one or more media items includes a second media item that is different from the first media item; and in response to detecting the request to modify the set of one or more media items based on the respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item: in accordance with a determination that a first subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the first subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the first subset of one or more edits does not include at least one edit included in the set of edits; and in accordance with a determination that a second subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the second subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the second subset of one or more edits is different from the first subset of one or more edits.

86. The method of claim 85, wherein the set of one or more media items includes a third media item that is different from the first media item and the second media item.

87. The method of any one of claims 85-86, further comprising: prior to detecting the request to modify the set of one or more media items based on the respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to initiate a process to copy edits of the set of edits that were made to the first media item; and in response to detecting the request to initiate the process to copy the edits of the set of edits that were made to the first media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a user interface configured to receive one or more user inputs to select a respective subset, of the set of edits, to be copied.

88. The method of claim 87, wherein displaying the user interface includes displaying a set of graphical elements that correspond to the set of edits that were made to the first media item.

89. The method of claim 88, wherein displaying the set of graphical elements includes: in accordance with a determination that the set of edits that were made to the first media item is a first set of edits, displaying the set of graphical elements with a first visual appearance; and in accordance with a determination that the set of edits that were made to the first media item is a second set of edits that is different from the first set of edits, displaying the set of graphical elements with a second visual appearance that is different from the first visual appearance.

90. T he method of any one of claims 88-89, wherein: the set of graphical elements include a first selectable object to enable and / or disable the copying of a first edit made to the first media item; and the set of graphical elements include a second selectable object, different from the first selectable object, to enable and / or disable the copying of a second edit made to the first media item, wherein the second edit is different from the first edit.

91. The method of claim 90, wherein: the first selectable object is displayed adjacent to a representation of the first edit; and the second selectable object is displayed adjacent to a representation of the second edit, wherein the representation of the second edit is different from the representation of the first edit.

92. T he method of any one of claims 90-91, wherein: the first edit is enabled for copying by default; and the second edit is disabled for copying by default.

93. The method of claim 92, wherein the second edit includes an edit that crops anchor rotates a media item.

94. The method of any one of claims 92-93, the first edit includes an edit that changes a color, a saturation, and / or a brightness of a media item.

95. The method of any one of claims 92-94, wherein first edit includes an edit that is based on a depth map.

96. The method of any one of claims 85-95, wherein the first subset of one or more edits includes an edit that is based on image segmentation.

97. The method of any one of claims 85-96, wherein the first subset of one or more edits includes an edit that is based on a selection of a filter and / or a style.

98. The method of any one of claims 85-97, wherein the first subset of one or more edits includes an edit to change a color, a saturation, and / or a brightness.

99. The method of any one of claims 85-98, wherein the first subset of one or more edits includes an edit to crop and or rotate an image.

100. The method of any one of claims 85-99, further comprising: prior to detecting the request to modify the set of one or more media items based on the respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to initiate a process to copy edits of the set of edits that were made to the first media item; and in response to detecting the request to initiate the process to copy the edits of the set of edits that were made to the first media item: in accordance with a determination that the set of edits that were made to the first media item include one or more edits from more than a threshold number of different edit categories, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a user interface a user interface configured to receive one or more user inputs to select a respective subset, of the set of edits, to be copied; and in accordance with a determination that the set of edits that were made to the first media item do not include one or more edits from more than the threshold number of different edit categories, forgoing display of the user interface configured to receive one or more user inputs to select a respective subset, of the set of edits, to be copied.

101. The method of any one of claims 85-100, further comprising: before detecting the request to modify the set of one or more media items based on the respective subset of one or more edits that were made to the first media item, copying a plurality of edits of the set of one or more edits that were made to the first media item; andafter copying the plurality of edits, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs selecting the respective subset of the one or more edits that were made to the first media item based on a selection and / or deselection of one or more edits from the plurality of edits.

102. The method of any one of claims 85-101 , further comprising: displaying a media item editing user interface, including: in accordance with a determination that a system setting that corresponds to a first setting that changes the color of one or more first types of visual objects in a first manner and changes the color of one or more second types of visual objects in a second manner, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, at least a portion of the media item editing user interface with a visual appearance that is based on the first setting; and in accordance with a determination that the system setting corresponds to a second setting that changes the color of the one or more first types of visual objects in a third manner and changes the color of the one or more second types of visual objects in a fourth manner, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, at least the portion of media item editing user interface with a visual appearance that is based on the second setting, wherein the third manner is different from the first manner, and wherein the fourth manner is different from the second manner.

103. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generations components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 85-102.

104. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generations components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instmctions for performing the method of any of claims 85-102.

105. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generations components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 85-102.

106. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generations components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 85-102.

107. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generations components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: subsequent to a first media item having been edited using a set of edits, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to modify a set of one or more media items based on a respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item, wherein: the respective subset of one or more edits includes one or more edits from the set of edits that were made to the first media item; and the set of one or more media items includes a second media item that is different from the first media item; and in response to detecting the request to modify the set of one or more media items based on the respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item: in accordance with a determination that a first subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the first subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the first subset of one or more edits does not include at least one edit included in the set of edits; and in accordance with a determination that a second subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the second subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the second subset of one or more edits is different from the first subset of one or more edits.

108. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generations components and one or more input devices, comprising: one or more processors; andmemory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: subsequent to a first media item having been edited using a set of edits, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to modify a set of one or more media items based on a respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item, wherein: the respective subset of one or more edits includes one or more edits from the set of edits that were made to the first media item; and the set of one or more media items includes a second media item that is different from the first media item; and in response to detecting the request to modify the set of one or more media items based on the respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item: in accordance with a determination that a first subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the first subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the first subset of one or more edits does not include at least one edit included in the set of edits; and in accordance with a determination that a second subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the second subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the second subset of one or more edits is different from the first subset of one or more edits.

109. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generations components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: means for, subsequent to a first media item having been edited using a set of edits, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to modify a set of one or more media items based on a respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item, wherein: the respective subset of one or more edits includes one or more edits from the set of edits that were made to the first media item; and the set of one or more media items includes a second media item that is different from the first media item; and means for, in response to detecting the request to modify the set of one or more media items based on the respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item:in accordance with a determination that a first subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the first subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the first subset of one or more edits does not include at least one edit included in the set of edits; and in accordance with a determination that a second subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the second subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the second subset of one or more edits is different from the first subset of one or more edits.

110. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generations components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: subsequent to a first media item having been edited using a set of edits, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request to modify a set of one or more media items based on a respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item, wherein: the respective subset of one or more edits includes one or more edits from the set of edits that were made to the first media item; and the set of one or more media items includes a second media item that is different from the first media item; and in response to detecting the request to modify the set of one or more media items based on the respective subset of the set of edits that were made to the first media item: in accordance with a determination that a first subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the first subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the first subset of one or more edits does not include at least one edit included in the set of edits; and in accordance with a determination that a second subset of one or more edits of the set of edits is selected, modifying the set of one or more media items by applying the second subset of one or more edits to the set of one or more media items, wherein the second subset of one or more edits is different from the first subset of one or more edits.

111. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices:while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media item including a foreground element and a first background element, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to a request to modify the media item, including: detecting at least a portion of the input is directed to a location of the foreground element and a location of the first background element; and in response to detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item: in accordance with a determination that an initial location of the input is directed to the location of the first background element, modifying the media item, that is displayed via the one or more display generation components, by modifying at least a portion of the first background element without modifying the foreground element to which the input was directed.

112. The method of claim 1 1 1 , further comprising: in response to detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item: in accordance with a determination that the initial location of the input is directed to the location of the foreground element, modifying the media item by modifying at least a portion of the foreground element without modifying the first background element to which the input was directed.

113. The method of any one of claims 11 1 -112, wherein detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item includes; detecting at least a portion of the input is directed to a location of the foreground element at a first time; detecting at least a portion of the input is directed to a location that does not correspond to a location of the foreground element at a second time, after the first time; and detecting at least a portion of the input is directed to a location of the foreground element at a third time, after the second time.

114. The method of any one of claims 1 11-113, wherein detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item includes: detecting at least a portion of the input is directed to a location of a second background element, different from the first background element.

115. The method of any one of claims 111-114, wherein modifying at least the portion of the first background element includes: replacing at least the portion of the first background element with automatically- generated visual content that is based on content of the media item that is near the first background element.1 16. The method of tiny one of claims 1 1 1 -115. wherein the foreground element and the first background element are distinguished from each other automatically based on information associated with the media item.1 17. The method of any one of claims 1 1 1 -1 16, further comprising: prior to detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item, detecting a request to display a media editing user interface; and in response to detecting the request to display the media editing user interface, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a visual effect emphasizing a first type of element of the media item relative to a second type of element of the media item, different from the first type of element.

118. The method of claim 1 I 7, wherein emphasizing the first type of element includes decreasing the visual effect that emphasizes of the first type of element relative to the second type of element over a period of time.

119. The method of any one of claims 117-118, wherein emphasizing the first type of element relative to the second type of element includes displaying a visual indication having a brightness level that includes a degree of brightness that exceeds a standard dynamic range of brightness for the one or more display generation components.

120. The method of any one of claims 11 1-1 19, wherein modifying the first background element includes modifying a respective portion of the first background element, wherein the input is not directed to the respective portion of the first background element.

121. The method of claim 120, wherein detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item includes detecting a movement component of the input directed to one or more locations of the first background element.

122. The method of claim 121 , further comprising: in response to detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first indication at one or more locations corresponding to one or more locations of the movement component; and gradually reducing a visual emphasis of the first indication over time.

123. The method of any one of claims 121 -122, wherein the first indication includes a first visual characteristic, the method further comprising: in response to detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item and in accordance with a determination that an initial location of the input is directed to the location of the first background element: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, an indication at one or more locations of the first background element, wherein the indication at one or more locations of the first background element includes the first visual characteristic.

124. The method of any one of claims 121 - 123, further comprising: in response to detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item, wherein the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item traverses a path: in accordance with a determination that the path crosses one or more detected visual elements of the media item, displaying a first type of indication; and in accordance with a determination that the path does not cross one or more detected visual elements of the media item, displaying a second type of indication, different from the first type of indication.

125. The method of any one of claims 121-124, wherein the first indication is displayed with a brightness level that includes a degree of brightness that exceeds a standard dynamic range of brightness for the one or more display generation components.

126. The method of any one of claims 111-125, wherein the media item includes a first element that is automatically detected by the computer system, the method further comprising: while displaying the media item including the first element, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a respective input directed to a location of the first element and without detecting a movement component of the respective input; and in response to detecting the respective input directed to the location of the first element and without detecting the movement component of the respective input, selecting the first element of the media item.

127. The method of any one of claims 1 1 1 -126, further comprising: in response to detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item and in accordance with the determination that the initial location of the input is directed to the location of the first background element: displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a visual indication that visually distinguishes the first background element from content in the media item.

128. The method of claim 127, further comprising: in response to detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item and in accordance with the determination that the initial location of the input is directed to the location of the first background element: ceasing display, via the one or more display generation components, of a visual indication that visually distinguishes a second element from content of the media item.

129. The method of any one of claims 1 11-128, wherein modifying at least a portion of the first background element without modifying the foreground element to which the input was directed includes: in accordance with a determination that the media item is displayed at a first zoom level, modifying at least the portion of the first background element using a respective dimension for modifying the media item in response to detecting an input; and in accordance with a determination that the media item is displayed at a second zoom level, different from the first zoom level, modifying at least the portion of the firstbackground element using the respective dimension for modifying the media item in response to detecting the input.

130. The method of any one of claims 1 1 1 -129, wherein modifying at least a portion of the first background element without modifying the foreground element to which the input was directed includes: in accordance with a determination that a setting for a dimension for modifying the media item in response to detecting a respective input is set at a first value, modifying at least the portion of the first background element using a first dimension for the respective input; and in accordance with a determination that the setting for the dimension for modifying the media item in response to detecting the respective input is set at a second value that is different from the first value, modifying at least the portion of the first background element using a second dimension for the respective input that is different from the first dimension.

131. The method of any one of claims 111-130, wherein: modifying at least the portion of the first background element includes displaying, via the one or more display generation components, an animation of gradually ceasing to display the portion of the first background element, including: in accordance with a determination that the portion of the first background element has a first color, a respective color of the animation is based on the first color; and in accordance with a determination that the portion of the first background element has a second color, different from the first color, the respective color of the animation is based on the second color.

132. The method of claim 131, wherein the animation of gradually ceasing display of the portion of the first background element includes moving a graphical element having the respective color away from the portion of the first background element.

133. The method of any one of claims 1 1 1 -132, further comprising: detecting, via the one or more input devices, an undo input directed to an undo selectable object; in response to detecting the undo input directed to the undo selectable object, undoing a first modification that is a most recently performed modification;subsequent to detecting the undo input, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a redo input directed to a redo selectable object; and in response to detecting the redo input, redoing the first modification.

134. The method of any one of claims 1 11-133, further comprising: prior detecting the request to modify the media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components t, a first media editing user interface that includes a first selectable object that corresponds to a first category of one or more editing tools; detecting, via one or more input devices, an input directed to the first selectable object; and in response to detecting the input directed to the first selectable object, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a second media editing user interface that includes a first set of editing selectable objects that, when selected, modifies the media item via one or more machine learning algorithms, wherein the second media editing user interface is displayed when the request to modify the media item is detected, and wherein at least the portion of first background element is modified via the one or more machine learning algorithms.

135. T he method of claim 134, wherein the first media editing user interface includes: a second selectable object, different from the first selectable object, that corresponds to a second category of one or more editing tools, wherein the second selectable object is concurrently displayed with the first selectable object; the method further comprises: after detecting the input directed to the first selectable object, detecting, via one or more input devices, an input directed to the second selectable object; and in response to detecting the input directed to the second selectable object: displaying, via the one or more generation components, the second category of one or more editing tools without displaying first category of one or more editing tools, wherein the second category of one or more editing tools includes: an editable selectable object for adjusting a first editable parameter of the media item; and an editable selectable object for adjusting a second editable parameter of the media item that is different from the first editable parameter.

136. The method of any one of claims 134-135, wherein the second media editing user interlace includes an indication of one or more input criteria that needs to be satisfied in order to modify the media item via the one or more machine learning algorithms.

137. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 111-136.

138. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instmctions for performing the method of any of claims 111-136.

139. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 111-136.

140. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with a with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 111-136.

141. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instmctions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media item including a foreground element and a first background element, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to a request to modify the media item, including:detecting at least a portion of the input is directed to a location of the foreground element and a location of the first background element; and in response to detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item: in accordance with a determination that an initial location of the input is directed to the location of the first background element, modifying the media item, that is displayed via the one or more display generation components, by modifying at least a portion of the first background element without modifying the foreground element to which the input was directed.

142. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media item including a foreground element and a first background element, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to a request to modify the media item, including: detecting at least a portion of the input is directed to a location of the foreground element and a location of the first background element; and in response to detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item: in accordance with a determination that an initial location of the input is directed to the location of the first background element, modifying the media item, that is displayed via the one or more display generation components, by modifying at least a portion of the first background element without modifying the foreground element to which the input was directed.

143. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising: means for, while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media item including a foreground element and a first background element, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to a request to modify the media item, including:detecting at least a portion of the input is directed to a location of the foreground element and a location of the first background element; and means for, in response to detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item: in accordance with a determination that an initial location of the input is directed to the location of the first background element, modifying the media item, that is displayed via the one or more display generation components, by modifying at least a portion of the first background element without modifying the foreground element to which the input was directed.

144. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media item including a foreground element and a first background element, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to a request to modify the media item, including: detecting at least a portion of the input is directed to a location of the foreground element and a location of the first background element; and in response to detecting the input corresponding to the request to modify the media item: in accordance with a determination that an initial location of the input is directed to the location of the first background element, modifying the media item, that is displayed via the one or more display generation components, by modifying at least a portion of the first background element without modifying the foreground element to which the input was directed.

145. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a representation of a video media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs corresponding to a request to edit the video media item; andin response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the request to edit the video media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes: in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is below a threshold playback speed, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface, wherein the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects enable one or more slow motion playback parameters of the video media item to be adjusted; and in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is not below the threshold playback speed, forgoing display of the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface.

146. The method of claim 145, further comprising: while displaying the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a first slow motion editing control user interface object of the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the first slow motion editing control user interface object of the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects, adjusting a respective portion of the video media item that is configured to play with the playback speed that is below the threshold playback speed.

147. The method of any of claims 145-146, further comprising: while displaying a playback speed user interface object, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to the playback speed user interface object; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the playback speed user interface object, adjusting a playback speed of at least a portion of the video media item from a first playback speed to a second playback speed that is different from the first playback speed.

148. The method of claim 147, the method further comprising:while displaying a speed adjustment user interface object, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to selection of the speed adjustment user interface object; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to selection of the speed adjustment user interface object, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the playback speed user interface object.

149. The method of any of claims 147-148, further comprising: in response to detecting one or more inputs corresponding to a request to edit a second video media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a second media editing user interface, wherein displaying the second media editing user interface includes: in accordance with a determination that a frame rate of the second video media item is above a frame rate threshold, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a second speed adjustment user interface object; and in accordance with a determination that the frame rate of the second video media item is not above the frame rate threshold, forgoing display of the second speed adjustment user interface object.

150. The method of any of claims 145-149, further comprising: while displaying the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to adjust a playback speed of the video media item; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to adjust the playback speed of the video media item, ceasing display of the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects.

151. The method of any of claims 145-150, further comprising: while displaying the media editing user interface without displaying the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to adjust a playback speed of the video media item; andin response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to adjust the playback speed of the video media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects.

152. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 145-151.

153. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 145-151.

154. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 145-151.

155. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 145-151.

156. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a representation of a video media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs corresponding to a request to edit the video media item; andin response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the request to edit the video media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes: in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is below a threshold playback speed, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface, wherein the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects enable one or more slow motion playback parameters of the video media item to be adjusted; and in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is not below the threshold playback speed, forgoing display of the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface.

157. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a representation of a video media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs corresponding to a request to edit the video media item; and in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the request to edit the video media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes: in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is below a threshold playback speed, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface, wherein the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects enable one or more slow motion playback parameters of the video media item to be adjusted; and in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is not below the threshold playback speed,forgoing display of the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface.

158. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising: means for, while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a representation of a video media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs corresponding to a request to edit the video media item; and means for, in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the request to edit the video media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes: in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is below a threshold playback speed, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface, wherein the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects enable one or more slow motion playback parameters of the video media item to be adjusted; and in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is not below the threshold playback speed, forgoing display of the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface.

159. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a representation of a video media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs corresponding to a request to edit the video media item; and in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the request to edit the video media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes:in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is below a threshold playback speed, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface, wherein the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects enable one or more slow motion playback parameters of the video media item to be adjusted; and in accordance with a determination that the video media item is configured to play with a playback speed that is not below the threshold playback speed, forgoing display of the one or more slow motion editing control user interface objects in the media editing user interface.

160. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface of a media item that includes audio, wherein the media editing user interface includes an audio control user interface object, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs directed to the audio control user interface object; in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust a current value of a first audio mix effect to a first value of a plurality of values for the first audio mix effect, adjusting a magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the first value for the first audio mix effect; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust the current value of the first audio mix effect to a second value of the plurality of values for the first audio mix effect that is different from the first value of the plurality of values, adjusting the magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the second value that is different from the first value for the first audio mix effect.

161. The method of claim 160, wherein the audio control user interface object is displayed concurrently with a plurality of audio mix effect user interface objects on the media editing user interface.

162. The method of claim 161, wherein the plurality of audio mix effect user interface objects includes a first audio mix effect user interface object corresponding to a voice emphasis audio mix effect.

163. The method of any of claims 161-162, wherein the plurality of audio mix effect user interface objects includes a second audio mix effect user interface object corresponding to a background noise removal audio mix effect.

164. The method of any of claims 161-163, wherein the plurality of audio mix effect user interface objects includes a third audio mix effect user interface object corresponding to a field of view emphasis audio mix effect, wherein the field of view emphasis audio mix effect emphasizes sounds corresponding to a field of view of one or more cameras used to capture a respective media item.

165. The method of claim 164, wherein the sounds corresponding to the field of view of the one or more cameras used to capture the respective media item are determined based on visual information captured via the one or more cameras while recording audio of the respective media item.

166. The method of any of claims 164-165, wherein the sounds corresponding to the field of view of the one or more cameras used to capture the respective media item are determined based on differences between a first audio stream of the respective media item captured via a first microphone and a second audio stream of the respective media item captured via a second microphone, wherein the first microphone and the second microphone are physically separate from one another.

167. The method of any of claims 161-166, further comprising: while concurrently displaying the audio control user interface object and the plurality of audio mix effect user interface objects, detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to selection of a respective audio mix effect user interface object; andin response to detecting the user input corresponding to selection of the respective audio mix effect user interface object, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a second media editing user interface corresponding to a second audio mix effect that is different from the first audio mix effect.

168. The method of claim 167, wherein the second media editing user interface includes a second audio control user interface object, the method further comprising: while displaying the second audio control user interface object, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more directed to the second audio control user interface object; and in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the second audio control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the second audio control user interface object include a request to adjust a current value of the second audio mix effect to a first value of a plurality of values for the second audio mix effect, adjusting a magnitude of the second audio mix effect to the first value for the second audio mix effect; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the second audio control user interface object include a request to adjust the current value of the second audio mix effect to a second value of the plurality of values for the second audio mix effect that is different from the first value of the plurality of values, adjusting the magnitude of the second audio mix effect to the second value that is different from the first value for the second audio mix effect.

169. The method of claim 168, further comprising: in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the one or more user inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a first input in a first direction, increasing the magnitude of the first audio mix effect; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more user inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a second input in a second direction that is different from the first direction, decreasing the magnitude of the first audio mix effect; andin response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the second audio control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the one or more user inputs corresponding to the second audio control user interface object include a third input in the first direction, increasing the magnitude of the second audio mix effect; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the second audio control user interface object include a fourth input in the second direction that is different from the first direction, decreasing the magnitude of the second audio mix effect.

170. The method of claim 169, wherein: a difference between the first audio mix effect and the second audio mix effect increases based on increasing the magnitude of the first audio mix effect and / or increasing the magnitude of the second audio mix effect, and the difference between the first audio mix effect and the second audio mix effect decreases based on decreasing the magnitude of the first audio mix effect and / or decreasing the magnitude of the second audio mix effect.

171. The method of any of claims 167-170, further comprising: in response to detecting the user input corresponding to selection of the respective audio mix effect user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the respective audio mix effect user interface object is of a first type, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the second media editing user interface that includes the second audio control user interface object; and in accordance with a determination that the respective audio mix effect user interface object is of a second type that is different from the first type, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the second media editing user interface without displaying the second audio control user interface object.

172. The method of any of claims 167-171, further comprising: while displaying the second media editing user interface corresponding to the second audio mix effect that is different from the first audio mix effect, detecting, via the one ormore input devices, user input corresponding to a request to display the media editing user interface; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to the request to display the media editing user interface, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the media editing user interface that includes the audio control user interface object, wherein the audio control user interface object includes a value indicator corresponding to a respective value for the first audio mix effect, and wherein the respective value corresponds to a most recent value for the first audio mix effect.

173. The method of any of claims 167-172, wherein the second audio control user interface object includes a slider user interface object, the method further comprising: in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the second audio control user interface object, wherein the one or more user inputs corresponding to the second audio control user interface object include a request to move a position of the slider user interface object, outputting tactile feedback.

174. The method of any of claims 160-173, further comprising: while detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object, outputting the audio of the media item.

175. The method of claim 174, further comprising: while detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object and while outputting the audio of the media item: in accordance with a determination that an end of the audio of the media item is reached, outputting the audio of the media item from a beginning of the audio of the media item.

176. The method of any of claims 174-175, further comprising: while detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object and while outputting the audio of the media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to change a playback time of the audio of the media item; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to change the playback time of the audio of the media item, outputting the audio of the mediaitem from a respective playback time that is based on the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to change the playback time of the audio of the media item.

177. The method of any of claims 160-176, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes concurrently displaying the audio control user interface object and one or more editing control user interface objects.

178. The method of claim 177, wherein the one or more editing control user interface objects correspond to respective visual properties of the media item.

179. The method of any of claims 177-178, further comprising: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to selection of a respective editing control user interface object of the one or more editing control user interface objects; and in response to detecting the user input corresponding to selection of the respective editing control user interface object of the one or more editing control user interface objects: ceasing display of the audio control user interface object; and displaying, via the one or more display generation components, one or more control user interface objects corresponding to the respective editing control user interface object.

180. The method of any of claims 160-179, further comprising: in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object, reducing a visual prominence of one or more user interface objects of the media editing user interface.

181. The method of any of claims 160-180, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes displaying one or more audio mix effect user interface objects at a first position relative to the audio control user interface object, the method further comprising: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a change in orientation of the media editing user interface; and in response to detecting the change in orientation of the media editing user interface, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the one or more audio mix effect user interface objects at a second position relative to the audio control user interfaceobject that is different from the first position relative to the audio control user interface object.

182. The method of claim 181, further comprising: prior to the change in the orientation of the media editing user interface, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the media editing user interface, wherein displaying the media editing user interface includes displaying a scrubber user interface object that has a first spatial orientation relative to the audio control user interface object; and in response to the change in the orientation of the media editing user interface, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the scrubber with a second spatial orientation, different from the first spatial orientation, relative to the audio control user interface object.

183. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 160-182.

184. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 160-182.

185. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 160-182.

186. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 160-182.

187. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface of a media item that includes audio, wherein the media editing user interface includes an audio control user interface object, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs directed to the audio control user interface object; in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust a current value of a first audio mix effect to a first value of a plurality of values for the first audio mix effect, adjusting a magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the first value for the first audio mix effect; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust the current value of the first audio mix effect to a second value of the plurality of values for the first audio mix effect that is different from the first value of the plurality of values, adjusting the magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the second value that is different from the first value for the first audio mix effect.

188. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface of a media item that includes audio, wherein the media editing user interface includes an audio control user interface object, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs directed to the audio control user interface object; in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object:in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust a current value of a first audio mix effect to a first value of a plurality of values for the first audio mix effect, adjusting a magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the first value for the first audio mix effect; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust the current value of the first audio mix effect to a second value of the plurality of values for the first audio mix effect that is different from the first value of the plurality of values, adjusting the magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the second value that is different from the first value for the first audio mix effect.

189. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising: means for, while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface of a media item that includes audio, wherein the media editing user interface includes an audio control user interface object, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs directed to the audio control user interface object; means for, in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust a current value of a first audio mix effect to a first value of a plurality of values for the first audio mix effect, adjusting a magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the first value for the first audio mix effect; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust the current value of the first audio mix effect to a second value of the plurality of values for the first audio mix effect that is different from the first value of the plurality of values, adjusting the magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the second value that is different from the first value for the first audio mix effect.

190. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with oneor more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media editing user interface of a media item that includes audio, wherein the media editing user interface includes an audio control user interface object, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs directed to the audio control user interface object; in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object: in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust a current value of a first audio mix effect to a first value of a plurality of values for the first audio mix effect, adjusting a magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the first value for the first audio mix effect; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs corresponding to the audio control user interface object include a request to adjust the current value of the first audio mix effect to a second value of the plurality of values for the first audio mix effect that is different from the first value of the plurality of values, adjusting the magnitude of the first audio mix effect to the second value that is different from the first value for the first audio mix effect.

191. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to apply a respective media style to the media item; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to apply the respective media style to the media item: in accordance with a determination that the one or more user inputs include a first input in a first direction, applying a first media style to the media item, wherein the first media style corresponds to a first category of media styles; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs include a second input in a second direction that is different from the first direction, applying a second media style to the media item, wherein the second media style is different from thefirst media style, and wherein the second media style corresponds to a second category of media styles that is different from the first category of media styles.

192. The method of claim 191, further comprising: in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to apply the respective media style to the media item: in accordance with a determination that the one or more user inputs include the first input in the first direction and a further input in the first direction, applying a third media style to the media item, wherein: the third media style is different from the first media style, and the third media style corresponds to the first category of media styles.

193. The method of any of claims 191-192, further comprising: in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to apply the respective media style to the media item: in accordance with a determination that the one or more user inputs include the second input in the second direction and a further input in the second direction, applying a fourth media style to the media item, wherein: the fourth media style is different from the second media style, and the fourth media style corresponds to the second category of media styles.

194. The method of any of claims 191-193, wherein: the first category of media styles includes changing one or more visual parameters of the media item by less than a threshold amount, and the second category of media styles includes changing one or more visual parameters of the media item by more than the threshold amount.

195. The method of claim 194, wherein the first category of media styles includes changing a first set of one or more colors of the media item, and the second category of media styles includes changing a second set of one or more colors of the media item, wherein the second set of one or more colors includes more colors than the first set of one or more colors.

196. The method of any of claims 194-195, wherein the first category of media styles includes changing one or more first colors of the media item by less than a threshold amount, and the second category of media styles includes changing one or more second colors of the media item by more than the threshold amount.

197. The method of any of claims 194-196, wherein a first range of values corresponding to a respective visual parameter for the first category of media styles includes a first maximum value and a first minimum value, a second range of values corresponding to a respective visual parameter for the second category of media styles includes a second maximum value that is greater than the first maximum value and a second minimum value that is less than the first minimum value.

198. The method of any of claims 191-197, further comprising: after detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to apply the respective media style to the media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to capture a new media item; in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to capture the new media item: in accordance with a determination that the respective media style is of the first category of media styles, applying the respective media style of the first category of media styles to the new media item; and in accordance with a determination that the respective media style is of the second category of media styles, applying a default media style to the new media item, wherein the default media style is different from the respective media style of the second category of media styles.

199. The method of any of claims 191-198, wherein: the first category of media styles adjust one or more visual parameters of the media item that cause skin tones of the media item to change by a first amount, and the second category of media styles adjust one or more visual parameters of the media item that cause skin tones of the media item to change by a second amount that is greater than the first amount.

200. The method of any of claims 191-199, further comprising: in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to apply the respective media style to the media item: selecting the respective media style; and displaying, via the display generation component, a first category indicator corresponding to the respective media style.

201. The method of claim 200, further comprising: while displaying the first category indicator corresponding to the respective media style, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to apply a new media style to the media item; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to apply the new media style to the media item: in accordance with a determination that the new media style is of the same category as the respective media style, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, the first category indicator; and in accordance with a determination that the new media style is a different category from the respective media style, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a second category indicator corresponding to the new media style.

202. The method of any of claims 191-201, wherein: while a respective media style of the first category of media styles is applied to the media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a first set of style control options; while displaying the first set of style control options, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a respective style control option of the first set of style control options, wherein the one or more user inputs include a request to adjust a current value of a respective parameter of the respective media style of the first category of media styles; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the respective style control option of the first set of style control options, adjusting the current value of the respective parameter of the respective media style to an updated value.

203. The method of claim 202, further comprising: while a third media style that corresponds to a standard category of media styles is applied to the media item, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a second set of style control options, wherein the second set of style control options include less options than the first set of style control options.

204. The method of any of claims 202-203, further comprising: while a selected media style is applied to the media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to selection of a style indicator of the media editing user interface, wherein the style indicator corresponds to the selected media style; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to selection of the style indicator, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a respective set of style control options.

205. The method of any of claims 202-204, wherein: the first set of style control options includes a media editing control user interface object, and the media editing control user interface object includes a two-dimensional region that is configured to concurrently adjust one or more current values of a first parameter of the media item and one or more current values of a second parameter of the media item.

206. The method of claim 205, wherein: the first parameter of the media item includes saturation, and the one or more current values of the saturation of the media item are adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of a parameter index point relative to a first axis of the two-dimensional region.

207. The method of any of claims 205-206, wherein the second parameter of the media item includes tone, the one or more current values of the tone of the media item include respective tone curves, anda respective tone curve of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of a parameter index point relative to a second axis of the two- dimensional region.

208. The method of any of claims 202-207, further comprising: prior to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the respective style control option of the first set of style control options, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a graphical user interface element that includes a visual indication of the current value of the respective parameter; detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs directed to the respective style control option of the first set of style control options; and in response to detecting the one or more inputs directed to the respective style control option of the first set of style control options, updating the graphical user interface element to include a visual indication of the updated value of the respective parameter.

209. The method of any of claims 202-208, further comprising: prior to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the respective style control option of the first set of style control options, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a visual indication of the current value of the respective parameter, wherein the visual indication of the current value of the respective parameter is displayed proximate to a position of the media item relative to the one or more display generation components; detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more inputs directed to the respective style control option of the first set of style control options; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the respective style control option of the first set of style control options, displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a visual indication of the updated value of the respective parameter, wherein the visual indication of the updated value of the respective parameter is displayed proximate to the position of the media item relative to the one or more display generation components.

210. The method of any of claims 202-209, wherein the first set of style control options includes a slider user interface object.

211. The method of claim 210, wherein a magnitude of a shift of one or more colors of the media item is adjusted based on user input that includes a change in position of a point of the slider user interface object.

212. The method of any of claims 210-211, wherein the shift of the one or more colors of the media item is based on a selected media style.

213. The method of any of claims 191-212, wherein: the first media style of the first category media styles corresponds to one or more visual parameters having a first set of respective values; and the second media style of the second category of media styles corresponds to the one or visual parameters having a second set of respective values that are different from the first set of respective values.

214. The method of claim 213, wherein the media user interface includes one or more style control user interface objects that are configured to adjust the one or more visual parameters of the respective media style, and wherein the one or more style control user interface objects include a visual indication of a default value of a respective parameter of the one or more visual parameters for the respective media style.

215. The method of claim 214, wherein: the visual indication of the default value of the respective parameter of the one or more visual parameters for the respective media style is displayed at a first location, and the one or more style control user interface objects include a visual indication of a current value of the respective parameter of the one or more visual parameters for the respective media style that is displayed at a second location different from the first location.

216. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 191-215.

217. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 191-215.

218. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 191-215.

219. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 191-215.

220. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to apply a respective media style to the media item; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to apply the respective media style to the media item: in accordance with a determination that the one or more user inputs include a first input in a first direction, applying a first media style to the media item, wherein the first media style corresponds to a first category of media styles; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs include a second input in a second direction that is different from the first direction, applying a second media style to the media item, wherein the second media style is different from the first media style, and wherein the second media style corresponds to a second category of media styles that is different from the first category of media styles.

221. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to apply a respective media style to the media item; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to apply the respective media style to the media item: in accordance with a determination that the one or more user inputs include a first input in a first direction, applying a first media style to the media item, wherein the first media style corresponds to a first category of media styles; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs include a second input in a second direction that is different from the first direction, applying a second media style to the media item, wherein the second media style is different from the first media style, and wherein the second media style corresponds to a second category of media styles that is different from the first category of media styles.

222. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising: means for, while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to apply a respective media style to the media item; and means for, in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to apply the respective media style to the media item: in accordance with a determination that the one or more user inputs include a first input in a first direction, applying a first media style to the media item, wherein the first media style corresponds to a first category of media styles; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs include a second input in a second direction that is different from the first direction, applying a secondmedia style to the media item, wherein the second media style is different from the first media style, and wherein the second media style corresponds to a second category of media styles that is different from the first category of media styles.

223. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to apply a respective media style to the media item; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to apply the respective media style to the media item: in accordance with a determination that the one or more user inputs include a first input in a first direction, applying a first media style to the media item, wherein the first media style corresponds to a first category of media styles; and in accordance with a determination that the one or more inputs include a second input in a second direction that is different from the first direction, applying a second media style to the media item, wherein the second media style is different from the first media style, and wherein the second media style corresponds to a second category of media styles that is different from the first category of media styles.

224. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more input devices: detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to configure a media style for a camera that is in communication with the computer system; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to configure the media style for the camera that is in communication with the computer system, prompting a user to select one or more media items to preview the media style, wherein the one or more media items correspond to an account of the user.

225. The method of claim 224, wherein prompting the user to select one or more media items to preview the media style includes prompting the user to select two or more media items to preview the media style.

226. The method of any of claims 224-225, wherein the one or more media items are selected from a subset of a set of media items corresponding to the account of the user that satisfy a set of one or more criteria.

227. The method of any of claims 224-226, further comprising: after prompting the user to select the one or more media items to preview the media style, displaying, via one or more display generation components that are in communication with the computer system, the one or more media items in a grid.

228. The method of any of claims 224-227, further comprising: after prompting the user to select the one or more media items to preview the media style, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to selection of the one or more media items; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to selection of the one or more media items, selecting the one or more media items to preview the media style.

229. The method of claim 228, further comprising: while the one or more media items are selected, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to change the media style; and in response to detecting the one or more inputs corresponding to the request to change the media style, adjusting an appearance of the one or more media items based on the change in the media style.

230. The method of claim 229, wherein: the one or more media items include a first media item and a second media item, and adjusting the appearance of the one or more media items based on the change in the media style includes concurrently adjusting an appearance of the first media item and an appearance of the second media item based on the change in the media style.

231. The method of any of claims 224-230, further comprising:after prompting the user to select the one or more media items to preview the media style, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to adjust a visual arrangement of the one or more media items; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to adjust the visual arrangement of the one or more media items, adjusting the visual arrangement of a respective media item of the one or more media items from a first visual arrangement to a second visual arrangement that is different from the first visual arrangement.

232. The method of claim 231, further comprising: while displaying the respective media item of the one or more media items in the second visual arrangement, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to change the media style; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to change the media style, adjusting an appearance of the respective media item of the one or more media items while maintaining display of the respective media item of the one or more media items at the second visual arrangement.

233. The method of any of claims 231-232, further comprising: while displaying the respective media item of the one or more media items in the second visual arrangement and with a first appearance that corresponds to the media style, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to adjust the visual arrangement of the one or more media items; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to adjust the visual arrangement of the one or more media items, displaying, via one or more display generation components that are in communication with the computer system, the respective media item of the one or more media items in a third visual arrangement and with a second appearance that corresponds to the media style.

234. The method of any of claims 224-233, further comprising: after prompting the user to select one or more media items to preview the media style, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to confirm the media style; andafter detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to confirm the media style, displaying, via one or more display generation components that are in communication with the computer system, a style editing user interface object that is configured to cause an adjustment to one or more parameters of the media style.

235. The method of claim 234, further comprising: while displaying the style editing user interface object that is configured to cause the adjustment to one or more parameters of the media style, displaying, via the one or more display generation components that are in communication with the computer system, a tutorial animation prompting the user to provide one or more user inputs corresponding to the style editing user interface object.

236. The method of any of claims 234-235, further comprising: while displaying the style editing user interface object that is configured to cause the adjustment to one or more parameters of the media style, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to the style editing user interface object; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the style editing user interface object, adjusting a current value for a first parameter of the one or more parameters of the media style to an updated value for the first parameter of the one or more parameters of the media style.

237. The method of claim 236, further comprising: after adjusting the current value for the first parameter of the one or more parameters of the media style to the updated value for the first parameter of the one or more parameters of the media style, displaying, via the one or more display generation components that are in communication with the computer system, a second style editing user interface object that is configured to cause an adjustment to a second parameter of the one or more parameters of the media style, wherein the second parameter of the one or more parameters of the media style is different from the first parameter of the one or more parameters of the media style.

238. The method of any of claims 236-237, further comprising: prior to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the style editing user interface object, displaying, via the one or more display generation components that are in communication with the computer system, one or more portions of the style editing userinterface object with a first level of visual prominence, wherein the one or more portions of the style editing user interface object indicate different possible values of the one or more parameters of the media style; and while adjusting the current value for the first parameter of the one or more parameters of the media style to the updated value for the first parameter of the one or more parameters of the media style, displaying, via the one or more display generation components that are in communication with the computer system, the one or more portions of the style editing user interface object with a second level of visual prominence, wherein the second level of visual prominence is less than the first level of visual prominence.

239. The method of claim 238, wherein the one or more portions of the style editing user interface object include grid indicators of a two-dimensional region having a first axis and a second axis.

240. The method of any of claims 238-239, wherein the one or more portions of the style editing user interface object include a visual indication of a neutral value of the one or more parameters.

241. The method of any of claims 238-240, wherein the one or more portions of the style editing user interface object include a visual indication of a default value of the one or more parameters for the media style.

242. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 224-241.

243. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 224-241.

244. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more input devices, comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 224-241.

245. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 224-241.

246. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to configure a media style for a camera that is in communication with the computer system; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to configure the media style for the camera that is in communication with the computer system, prompting a user to select one or more media items to preview the media style, wherein the one or more media items correspond to an account of the user.

247. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more input devices, comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to configure a media style for a camera that is in communication with the computer system; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to configure the media style for the camera that is in communication with the computer system, prompting a user to select one or more media items to preview the media style, wherein the one or more media items correspond to an account of the user.

248. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more input devices, comprising: means for detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to configure a media style for a camera that is in communication with the computer system; and means for, in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to configure the media style for the camera that is in communication with the computer system, prompting a user to select one or more media items to preview the media style, wherein the one or more media items correspond to an account of the user.

249. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to configure a media style for a camera that is in communication with the computer system; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to configure the media style for the camera that is in communication with the computer system, prompting a user to select one or more media items to preview the media style, wherein the one or more media items correspond to an account of the user.

250. A method, comprising: at a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to edit content of the media item; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to edit the content of the media item: in accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item satisfies a first set of content-based criteria, wherein the first set of contentbased criteria is based on an evaluation of content of the media item, replacing a respective portion of the content of the media item with content of a first type; andin accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item does not satisfy the first set of content-based criteria, replacing the respective portion of the content of the media item with content of a second type that is different from the content of the first type.

251. The method of claim 250, wherein the content of the first type includes automatically- generated infill content.

252. The method of claim 251, wherein the automatically-generated infill content is generated using a generative process that is based on the content of the media item.

253. The method of any of claims 250-252, wherein the content of the second type includes a redaction of the respective portion of the content of the media item.

254. The method of claim 253, wherein the redaction of the respective portion of the content of the media item is based on an appearance of the respective portion of the content of the media item.

255. The method of claim 254, wherein: the respective portion of the content of the media item includes a first visual fidelity, and the redaction of the respective portion of the content of the media item includes a second visual fidelity that is less than the first visual fidelity.

256. The method of any of claims 250-255, wherein: the content of the first type includes a first resolution, and the content of the second type includes a second resolution that is less than the first resolution.

257. The method of any of claims 250-256, wherein: the content of the first type includes photo-realistic content, and the content of the second type does not include photo-realistic content.

258. The method of any of claims 250-257, wherein the respective portion of the content of the media item is automatically identified.

259. The method of any of claims 250-258, wherein the first set of content-based criteria is based on an evaluation of one or more portions of the media item outside of the respective portion.

260. The method of claims 250-259, wherein the first set of content-based criteria is not satisfied when the evaluation of the content of the media item indicates that the media item is a high risk media item.

261. The method of any of claims 250-260, wherein the first set of content-based criteria is based on an evaluation of a change to the respective portion of the content of the media item.

262. The method of claim 261, wherein the change to the respective portion of the content of the media item includes removal of a face.

263. The method of any of claims 261-262, wherein the change to the respective portion of the content of the media item includes removal of an item of clothing.

264. The method of any of claims 250-263, wherein the first set of content-based criteria is based on a magnitude of a target portion of the media item to which the one or more user inputs are directed.

265. The method of claim 264, wherein the magnitude of the target portion of the media item to which the one or more user inputs are directed is based on a zoom level of the media item when the request to edit the content of the media item is detected.

266. The method of any of claims 264-265, wherein the magnitude of the target portion of the media item to which the one or more user inputs are directed is based on the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to edit the content of the media item.

267. The method of any of claims 250-266, wherein the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to edit the content of the media item include a first user input corresponding to a request to remove a selected portion of the content of the media item.

268. The method of claim 267, wherein replacing the respective portion of the content of the media item with the content of the first type includes replacing the respective portion of the content of the media item with replacement content that is based on surrounding content of the media item that is proximate to the respective portion of the content of the media item.

269. The method of any of claims 250-268, further comprising: concurrently displaying, via the one or more display generation components: the media editing user interface that includes the media item; and a visual indicator indicating whether the respective portion of the content of the media item is configured to be replaced by the content of the first type or the content of the second type.

270. The method of claim 269, wherein the visual indicator indicating whether the respective portion of the content of the media item is configured to be replaced by the content of the first type or the content of the second type is displayed prior to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to edit the media item.

271. The method of claim 269, wherein the visual indicator indicating whether the respective portion of the content of the media item is configured to be replaced by the content of the first type or the content of the second type is displayed after detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to edit the media item.

272. The method of any of claims 250-271, wherein the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to edit the media item include a request to edit the media item using a respective visual media editing option.

273. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more inputdevices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 250-272.

274. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 250-272.

275. A computer system that is configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising: means for performing the method of any of claims 250-272.

276. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims 250-272.

277. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to edit content of the media item; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to edit the content of the media item: in accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item satisfies a first set of content-based criteria, wherein the first set of content-based criteria is based on an evaluation of content of the media item, replacing a respective portion of the content of the media item with content of a first type; and in accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item does not satisfy the first set of content-based criteria, replacing the respectiveportion of the content of the media item with content of a second type that is different from the content of the first type.

278. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to edit content of the media item; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to edit the content of the media item: in accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item satisfies a first set of content-based criteria, wherein the first set of contentbased criteria is based on an evaluation of content of the media item, replacing a respective portion of the content of the media item with content of a first type; and in accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item does not satisfy the first set of content-based criteria, replacing the respective portion of the content of the media item with content of a second type that is different from the content of the first type.

279. A computer system configured to communicate with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, comprising: means for, while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to edit content of the media item; and means for, in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to edit the content of the media item: in accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item satisfies a first set of content-based criteria, wherein the first set of content-based criteria is based on an evaluation of content of the media item, replacing a respective portion of the content of the media item with content of a first type; andin accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item does not satisfy the first set of content-based criteria, replacing the respective portion of the content of the media item with content of a second type that is different from the content of the first type.

280. A computer program product, comprising one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system that is in communication with one or more display generation components and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: while displaying, via the one or more display generation components, a media user interface including a media item, detecting, via the one or more input devices, one or more user inputs corresponding to a request to edit content of the media item; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs corresponding to the request to edit the content of the media item: in accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item satisfies a first set of content-based criteria, wherein the first set of content-based criteria is based on an evaluation of content of the media item, replacing a respective portion of the content of the media item with content of a first type; and in accordance with a determination that the request to edit the content of the media item does not satisfy the first set of content-based criteria, replacing the respective portion of the content of the media item with content of a second type that is different from the content of the first type.

Images